2019 RENEGADE USER GUIDE
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can review
and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area
of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select
the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may
obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by
contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by
the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead
to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and
should never be done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA
US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents
precision workmanship, distinctive styling,
and high quality.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibil-
ity and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result
in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
This guide illustrates and describes the op-
eration of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifi-
cations and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on prod-
ucts previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help
you quickly become acquainted with the im-
portant features of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your Jeep
®
vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and
genuine MOPAR
®
parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO FIND YOUR
OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a ref-
erence item to help you quickly become ac-
quainted with the most important features
and processes of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information and procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your ve-
hicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics
discussed in this User Guide, as well as
information covering features and processes
not covered in this User Guide, the full ve-
hicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for
free online in a printer-friendly PDF format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro-
priate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By con-
verting from paper to electronic delivery for
the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de-
mand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding
an occupant in the driver's seat. Special
cases not complying with this rule will be
properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that
some details of the image do not correspond
to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been con-
ceived considering vehicles with the steering
wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible
that in vehicles with the steering wheel on the
right side, the position or construction of
some controls is not exactly mirror-like with
respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end
of this User Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-
cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the
relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always
a textual indication of the current chapter at
the side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored la-
bels whose symbols indicate precautions to
be observed when using this component.
Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information on the symbols used in
your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out
of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu-
vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper-
ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli-
sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or
fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government
notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In
Rollover Warning Label
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi-
cantly more likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to be followed to pre-
vent incorrect use of components which
could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol-
lowed to prevent against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
VEHICLE CHANGES/
ALTERATIONS
IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the
vehicle might seriously affect its safety and
road holding, thus causing accidents, in
which the occupants could even be fatally
injured.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
3
4
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
HOW TO FIND YOUR OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE ....1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............2
Essential Information ................2
Symbols ........................2
ROLLOVER WARNING ...................2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............3
VEHICLE CHANGES/ALTERATIONS ............3
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL ..................10
INTERIOR .........................11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ...........................12
Key Fob With Remote Control ..........12
IGNITION SWITCH ....................13
Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry .........................13
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....14
How To Use Remote Start ............15
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...........15
General Information ............... 16
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .....16
To Arm The System ................16
To Disarm The System ..............16
Disabling ......................17
DOORS ..........................17
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If
Equipped ......................17
Child Locks .....................21
SEATS ..........................22
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ..........22
Heated Seats — If Equipped ..........24
Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 ..... 24
HEAD RESTRAINTS ...................25
Front Head Restraints ...............25
Rear Head Restraints ...............26
STEERING WHEEL ....................26
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ........ 26
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .....27
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ....................27
Headlights .....................27
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped ......................28
High Beams .....................28
Flash-To-Pass ...................28
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .....28
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped ......................29
Parking Lights ...................29
Headlight Delay ..................29
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ......... 30
Turn Signals ....................30
WIPERS AND WASHERS ................30
Front Wiper Operation ...............31
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ......31
Rear Wiper Operation ...............32
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................34
Automatic Climate Control Overview ...... 34
Climate Control Functions ............42
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....42
Operating Tips ...................43
WINDOWS ........................43
Power Window Controls ..............43
Auto-Down Feature ................44
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection —
If Equipped .....................45
Wind Buffeting ..................45
POWER MY SKY SUN ROOF ...............45
Power My Sky Operation .............45
Emergency Open/Close .............. 46
POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED ........................47
Opening .......................48
Closing ........................48
Power Sun Shade ................. 48
Auto Reverse Feature ...............48
Sunroof Maintenance ...............49
HOOD ...........................49
To Open The Hood .................49
To Close The Hood .................49
LIFTGATE .........................50
Opening .......................50
Closing ........................50
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .................51
Power Outlet ....................51
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........51
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ........52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRU-
MENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........54
Instrument Cluster Display Controls ......54
Oil Change Reset ................. 55
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ....55
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Items . 55
TRIP COMPUTER ....................56
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ....56
Red Warning Lights ................57
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
Yellow Warning Lights ...............60
Yellow Indicator Lights .............. 63
White Indicator Lights ..............65
Blue Indicator Lights ...............65
Green Indicator Lights ..............65
Gray Indicator Lights ...............66
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) .......66
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ....................67
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS .......................67
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...................69
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........69
Electronic Brake Control System ........70
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............78
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . 78
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation — If Equipped ............. 81
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .....85
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...........91
Occupant Restraint Systems ...........91
Important Safety Precautions .......... 91
Seat Belt Systems .................92
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ....99
Child Restraints .................110
Transporting Pets ................121
SAFETY TIPS .....................121
Transporting Passengers ............121
Exhaust Gas ...................122
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ......................122
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ....................124
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ................125
Stopping The Engine ..............125
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......126
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) .............126
Auto Park Brake ................. 128
SafeHold .....................128
Brake Service Mode ...............128
MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...............129
Shifting ......................130
Downshifting ...................131
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ......132
Gear Selector ...................134
Gear Ranges ....................134
Transmission Limp Home Mode ........ 138
Ignition Park Interlock .............. 138
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . 139
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE ..................139
Four Wheel Drive (4x4) .............139
SELEC-TERRAIN ....................140
Mode Selection Guide ..............140
SPEED CONTROL ....................141
Activation .....................142
Setting A Desired Speed ............142
Resume Speed ..................143
Deactivation ....................143
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED .......................143
To Activate/Deactivate .............. 144
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 144
To Set A Desired ACC Speed .......... 145
To Cancel ..................... 145
To Resume ....................145
To Vary The Speed Setting ...........145
Setting The Following Distance In ACC ....147
General Information ...............147
REAR PARKSENSE ...................147
Rear ParkSense Sensors ............147
Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense . . . 148
Operation With A Trailer .............149
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....149
FRONT AND REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . 150
ParkSense Sensors ................150
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ......151
Side Distance Warning System .........151
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED .......................153
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System ................153
Exiting The Parking Space ...........154
LANESENSE ......................156
LaneSense Operation .............. 156
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .........157
LaneSense Warning Message ..........157
Changing LaneSense Status ..........159
REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............159
ADDING FUEL .....................160
TRAILER TOWING ...................162
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) ......................162
RECREATIONAL TOWING ................162
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ......................162
Recreational Towing ...............163
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............164
BULB REPLACEMENT .................164
7
Replacement Bulbs ............... 164
FUSES .........................166
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit ........................ 166
Body Computer Fuse Center ..........169
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit . . . 171
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ............172
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ......172
Preparations For Jacking ............173
Jacking Instructions ...............173
Road Tire Installation ..............176
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........177
Tire Service Kit Storage .............177
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . 177
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ......178
Replacing The Sealant .............179
JUMP STARTING ....................180
Preparations For Jump Start ..........180
Jump Starting Procedure ............181
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ..............182
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............182
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............183
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............183
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............185
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) ............186
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) ............ 186
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ....186
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . 187
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............187
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................188
Maintenance Plan ................188
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...............193
1.3L Turbo Engine ................193
2.4L Engine .................... 194
Checking Oil Level ................ 195
Cooling System .................195
Adding Washer Fluid ..............196
Brake System ................... 196
Manual Transmission — If Equipped .....197
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . 197
Maintenance-Free Battery ...........198
DEALER SERVICE ...................198
Windshield Wiper Blades ............199
RAISING THE VEHICLE .................200
TIRES ..........................200
Tire Safety Information .............200
Tires — General Information .........208
Tire Types .....................212
Spare Tires — If Equipped ..........213
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..........215
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) ......... 216
Tire Rotation Recommendations .......217
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES ...................217
Treadwear .....................218
Traction Grades ..................218
Temperature Grades ...............218
STORING THE VEHICLE ................219
BODYWORK .......................220
Preserving The Bodywork ............220
INTERIORS .......................220
Seats And Fabric Parts .............220
Plastic And Coated Parts ............221
Leather Parts ...................221
Glass Surfaces ..................222
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ...............223
Chassis Number .................223
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .....223
Torque Specifications .............. 223
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .................224
1.3L Turbo Engine ................224
2.4L Engine .................... 224
Materials Added To Fuel ............ 225
FLUID CAPACITIES ...................225
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............226
Engine .......................226
Chassis .......................227
MOPAR ACCESSORIES .................227
Authentic Accessories By Mopar .......227
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ...................229
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DISPLAY — IF
EQUIPPED .......................230
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A
Glance .......................230
Clock Setting ...................231
Audio Setting ................... 231
Radio Operation .................232
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone) ......................232
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ........233
Uconnect 4 At A Glance ............233
Drag & Drop Menu Bar .............235
Radio .......................236
Android Auto — If Equipped ..........237
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped . . 238
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY . 240
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance ......240
Drag & Drop Menu Bar .............241
Radio .......................242
Android Auto — If Equipped .......... 243
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped . . 247
UCONNECT SETTINGS .................249
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL INFORMATION . . . 250
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .........250
Reception Conditions ..............250
Care And Maintenance .............250
Anti-Theft Protection .............. 250
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF EQUIPPED .......251
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display) ................251
SiriusXM Guardian Activation .........252
Download The Uconnect App .........252
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4-inch Display) .............253
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account ......................253
Built-In Features ................253
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features .....256
USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . 258
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED .............258
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume .......................259
Finding Points Of Interest ...........261
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name . . . 261
One-Step Voice Destination Entry .......261
Setting Your Home Location ..........261
Home ........................261
Adding A Stop .................. 263
Taking A Detour ..................263
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display) ......................263
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display) ......................263
UCONNECT PHONE ..................265
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free
Calling) ......................265
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone
To The Uconnect System ............268
Common Phone Commands (Examples) . . . 271
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call . 272
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And
Vehicle ......................272
Phonebook ....................272
Voice Command Tips ..............272
Changing The Volume ..............272
Using Do Not Disturb ..............272
Incoming Text Messages ............273
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To Improve
Bluetooth Performance With Your Uconnect
System ......................274
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ....275
Introducing Uconnect ..............275
Get Started ....................275
Basic Voice Commands .............276
Radio ........................ 276
Media .......................277
Phone .......................278
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped ........279
Climate ....................... 280
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped .....280
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped .....................281
Register (4C/4C NAV) .............. 281
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) . . 281
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ............282
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) .........282
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .........283
Using Do Not Disturb ..............283
Android Auto — If Equipped .......... 283
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped .........284
General Information ...............285
Additional Information .............286
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR
VEHICLE ........................287
Prepare For The Appointment ......... 287
Prepare A List ...................287
Be Reasonable With Requests .........287
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............287
FCA US LLC Customer Center .........288
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...... 288
In Mexico Contact ................288
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands .....288
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...............288
Service Contract .................288
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............289
MOPAR PARTS .....................289
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............289
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .................289
In Canada .....................290
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............290
INDEX
.......................291
9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch 6 — Speed Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 7 — Switch Panel
3 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 8 — Uconnect System
4 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Controls
5 — Windshield Wiper Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 10 — Glove Compartment
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
10
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Door Handles 4 — Selec-Terrain Switch
2 — Door Locks / Window Switches 5 — Gear Selector
3 — Seats 6 — AUX Jack
11
KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/
STOP push button ignition system. The Re-
mote Keyless Entry system consists of a key
fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if
equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal.
Key Fob With Remote Control
The key fob with Remote Control contains a
Remote Keyless Entry feature. The Remote
Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key
fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
Key Fobs In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key
fob battery can be verified by referring to the
instrument cluster, which will display direc-
tions to follow.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the
key fob once to unlock the driver's door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors
and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on
the first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the ve-
hicle will re-lock and if equipped, the secu-
rity alarm will arm.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors and liftgate.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
1 — Unlock
2 — Lock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Panic
5 — Emergency Key
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn
will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” located in “Multime-
dia” for further programmable information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive En-
try” located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will
unlock again automatically if the key is left
inside the passenger compartment, otherwise
the doors will stay locked.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro-
grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-
grammed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as
long as the key fob is in the passenger com-
partment.
The push button ignition has three operating
positions. The three positions are OFF, ON,
and RUN.
13
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a
low or dead battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the igni-
tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against
the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
NOTE:
The vehicle will not start if the key fob is
located inside the cargo area and the liftgate
is opened.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition in
the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
WARNING!
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
For further information, refer to "Starting The
Engine," in "Starting And Operating" in the
Owner’s Manual.
REMOTE STARTING
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Push the remote start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the re-
mote start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
START/STOP Ignition Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14
To drive the vehicle, push the START/STOP
button to turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode.
NOTE:
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
• The vehicle must be started with the key
after two consecutive timeouts.
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the Re-
mote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button,
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the igni-
tion key is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key
after two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote
start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
is odorless and colorless. Carbon Mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause seri-
ous injury or death when inhaled.
WARNING!
• Keep key fobs away from children. Op-
eration of the Remote Start System,
windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will
flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut
down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
15
• The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed
in the ON/RUN position before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
— IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve-
hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized op-
eration. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
• The horn will pulse.
• The turn signals will flash.
• The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the “OFF” mode.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone (refer to "Doors" in "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
Manual for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to
unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting
To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to
disarm the system.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
16
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the lift-
gate button on the key fob cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during liftgate entry. If someone enters the
vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a
false alarm. If one of the previously described
arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm, regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Disabling
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the
case of long inactivity of the car), lock the
doors by turning the vehicle key in the exte-
rior door lock cylinder.
NOTE:
If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the
event of a failure to the system or to switch off
the alarm, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
DOORS
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If
Equipped
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement
to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system
and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This
feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the
key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further in-
formation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response
time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive
Entry Door Handle, and no door is opened
within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped, the security alarm will
arm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected
by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and pre-
vent the keyless-go system from starting
the vehicle.
17
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-
grammed, all doors will unlock when you grab
hold of the front driver’s door handle. To
select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab
the front passenger door handle to unlock all
four doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passen-
ger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Un-
lock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key
fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or
passenger front door handles, push the door
handle lock button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing
the door handle lock button. This could un-
lock the door(s).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18
NOTE:
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s inte-
rior door panel.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Passive Entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive
Entry vehicle:
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive
Entry door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search
will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry
key fob inside the car, and it does not find any
Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then
the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key
fob is detected outside the vehicle. The ve-
hicle will not unlock the doors when any of
the following conditions are met:
• The doors are manually locked using the
door lock knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob out-
side the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
either Passive Entry door handle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is
built into the electronic liftgate release. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Electronic
Liftgate release to open with one fluid mo-
tion.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
19
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of electronic
liftgate release.
NOTE:
• The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will
lock the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate
unlock feature is built into the Electronic
Liftgate release.
• If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-
grammed in the instrument cluster display,
if equipped, only the liftgate will unlock
when you push the Electronic Release. If
"Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is pro-
grammed in Uconnect, the liftgate will un-
lock when you push the electronic unlock/
lock button on the liftgate. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door
If the key fob battery is low or dead, the
emergency key can be used to unlock the
driver side door lock cylinder.
To release the emergency key, proceed as
follows:
1. Slide the emergency key release button to
the side.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key
fob with Remote Control housing.
NOTE:
The Emergency Key can be inserted into the
door lock cylinder from either direction.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle
unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be
severely injured or killed. Children
should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children, and do not leave the
ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A
child could start the vehicle, operate
Liftgate Release/Passive Entry
1 — Liftgate Handle
2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
20
WARNING!
power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat buildup may cause them to be
severely injured or killed
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small chil-
dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door
Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or ignition key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the
door can only be opened by using the out-
side door handle even though the inside
door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the desired
position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
21
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the desired
position.
• For emergency exit with the system en-
gaged, rotate the lock/unlock dial to the
unlocked position, roll down the window,
and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors
can only be opened from the outside when
the Child-Protection locks are engaged
(locked).
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
WARNING!
sion, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile
in a sudden stop or collision.
Split Rear Seats
The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat
which increases the storage of the rear cargo
area.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may
be necessary to position the front seat to its
mid-track position. Be sure that the front
seats are fully upright and positioned for-
ward, this will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
• Prior to folding the rear seat, you must
secure the rear armrest in the upright posi-
tion.
• You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply open-
ing the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal
shape.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides
additional storage in the rear cargo area.
Proceed as follows:
1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
2. Move the safety belts to the outboard side
of the seat.
3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both
sides of the rear seatbacks completely
forward.
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area
allows you to carry a single passenger on the
right side of the rear seat, while the enlarge-
ment of the right side allows you to carry two
passengers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer
to “Removable Rear Shelf” in “Cargo Area
Features” in your Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side
of the seat and rest them on the seat belt
guide.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the
left or right rear seatback completely
forward.
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents
the seatback from fully locking, you will have
difficulty returning the seat to its proper po-
sition.
Rear Seat
Release Lever
23
1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt
guides on the top edge of the seat to
ensure the seatbacks properly latch.
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back
until they lock on both the latches. Verify
the red notches are no longer visible on
the release lever. If the red notches are
visible, the seatback is not secure.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat buttons are located in your
vehicle’s touchscreen.
You can choose between two heating levels:
• Press the heated seat button
once to
turn the HI setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third
time to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 145 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will
change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO-level setting will turn off automati-
cally after approximately 60 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
when turning on the vehicle the driver’s
heated seat will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-
jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low
WARNING!
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sit-
ting in a seat that has been overheated
could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40
Tilt the head restraint forward and pull the
rear armrest tab to release it from the seat
and pull forward.
The center part of the rear seat can also be
used as rear armrest with cupholders.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
WARNING!
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints
should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push down-
ward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
25
Rear Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard
head restraints and one center head restraint
for its rear passengers. The rear head re-
straints can be raised or lowered. When the
center seat is being occupied, the head re-
straint should be in the raised position. When
there are no occupants in the center seat, the
head restraint can be lowered for maximum
visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see an authorized dealer.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering col-
umn. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Adjustment Button Locations
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
To unlock the steering column, push the
tilt/telescoping lever downward (toward the
floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as de-
sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull
the tilt/telescoping lever upward until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel switch
has been turned
on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes
or more before automatically shutting off.
This time will vary based on environmental
temperatures. The heated steering wheel can
shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm. The heated
steering wheel control button is located in
your vehicle’s touchscreen.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
when turning on the vehicle the heated steer-
ing wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-
jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must
exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of
any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the left
side of the instrument panel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the head-
lights, side marker lights, daytime running
lights, fog lights and the dimming of the
instrument cluster and interior lighting.
27
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the
instrument cluster and the controls located
on the instrument panel.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn
on when the engine is started and remain on
unless the headlights are turned on or the
engine is shut off.
The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal
operation and resume operation when the
turn signal operation has ended.
High Beams
To turn on the high beam headlights, push
the turn signal lever forward (toward the front
of the vehicle) and an indicator will illumi-
nate in the cluster. To turn off the high
beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle).
NOTE:
The headlights must be on for the high beams
to activate.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc-
tion lever toward you. This will cause the
headlights to turn on at high beam and re-
main on until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the head-
lights on or off according to ambient light
levels. To turn the system on, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise to the last detent
(AUTO position) for automatic headlight op-
eration. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you place the ignition into the OFF
position. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
Refer to “Headlight Delay” in this section for
more information.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the RUN or START
position before the headlights will come on in
the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared
LED, located on the windshield. It detects
changes in light intensity outside the vehicle,
based on the sensitivity of light set by using
the menu on the display or on the Uconnect
system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the
amount of external light required for control-
ling the lighting.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
— If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control
through the use of a digital camera mounted
on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automati-
cally switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
• The multifunction lever must be in the high
beam position in order to activate the Au-
tomatic High Beams.
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Con-
trol can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
When set to AUTO, the system automatically
turns the headlights on or off based on ambi-
ent light levels.
Parking Lights
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch to the first detent (parking position) to
turn on the parking lights. The parking light
indicator in the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
Headlight Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds when leav-
ing your vehicle in an unlit area.
The time delay of the headlights is program-
mable between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds.
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the igni-
tion in the OFF position while the headlights
are still on. Then, turn off the headlights
within two minutes. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off from
the “Low beam” position.
If the headlight switch is in AUTO position
and headlights were on before the ignition is
OFF, the delay interval begins automatically.
Headlight Delay Deactivation
The feature is disabled by turning on the
headlights, the parking lights or by placing
the ignition in the RUN position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is
turned on, they will turn off in the normal
manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within two
minutes of placing the ignition in the OFF
position to activate this feature.
29
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the fog light button on the headlight
switch. To turn off the front fog lights, push
the fog light button on the headlight switch a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog
lights.
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve
visibility at night while turning the vehicle.
When activated, a light incorporated in the
front fog light will illuminate on the side of
the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or
the turn signal indicator is on. It can be
activated through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and
a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Run-
ning Lamp will turn off on the side of the
vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo-
cated on the lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are oper-
ated by rotating a switch, located on the end
of the lever.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and
the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Windshield Wiper Stalk
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
Front Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of
the two detent positions for intermittent set-
tings, the third detent for low wiper operation
and the fourth for high wiper operation.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pulled while in the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and
then resume the intermittent interval previ-
ously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in
the off position, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles.
To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the wind-
WARNING!
shield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers neces-
sary. Push the lever upward to the MIST
position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash func-
tion must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the wind-
shield and automatically activates the wipers
for the driver. The feature is especially useful
for road splash or overspray from the wind-
shield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of
the two detent positions for intermittent set-
tings, to activate this feature.
NOTE:
If the end of the multifunction lever rotates
from off to the first intermittent setting or
from the first intermittent setting to the sec-
ond intermittent setting, the wipers will per-
form a round up to clean the windshield.
This function can be activated or deactivated
by the Uconnect Settings through the radio.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay po-
sition one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position two is the most sensitive. Place
the wiper switch in the off position when not
using the system.
Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition
When the user switches the ignition from OFF
to RUN or START with the lever already in the
intermittent position, no wipe cycle is per-
formed for safety reasons. This temporary
inhibition avoids accidental activations of the
wiping (e.g during the hand washing of the
31
windscreen, blocking the blades in ice/snow
conditions). The user can activate the Rain
Sensing Wipers in three ways:
• Moving the level in off position and then in
Intermittent positions.
• One MIST command actuation.
• The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h)
and the rain sensor detects the presence of
rain.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with automatic trans-
mission, the Rain Sensing Wipers will be-
come inactive even if the lever is in one of the
intermittent positions if the vehicle is placed
in NEUTRAL and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). This prevents damage
to the windshield wipers during an automatic
car wash.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
Rear Wiper Operation
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the lever on the right side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the
lever.
NOTE:
If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is
shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will per-
form one round up to clean the rear window.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation. If the front wiper is set to
Automatic Mode (on the wiper stalk as well as
“Enabled” through Uconnect settings), plac-
ing the rear wiper in an intermittent position
will cause the front and rear wipers to sync
up. Turning the front wipers off will cause the
rear wipers to also stop.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the end of the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the
off position, the wiper will operate for several
wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 30 seconds.
Once the lever is released, the pump will
resume normal operation.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located
with the Climate Controls on the instrument
panel. Push this button to turn on the rear
window defroster. An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster auto-
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
matically turns off after approximately
20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster
off, push the button a second time.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
when turning on the vehicle the driver’s
heated seat will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,
or abrasive window cleaners on the inte-
rior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
33
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
35
Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Push the button to turn on the MAX A/C setting. In MAX
A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Push the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON. Pushing the
AUTO control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on
the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change between manual mode and auto-
matic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
37
Icon Description
FRONT
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous set-
ting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indi-
cator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
Faceplate Knob
MODE
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touch-
screen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control
Push these buttons to regulate the temperature of the driver and passenger settings independently. Pushing the blue
arrow indicates cooler temperatures, while pushing the red button indicates warmer temperatures.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
Icon Description
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature set-
ting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only on the touchscreen.
Mode Button
Mode Button
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con-
ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
39
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con-
ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/
deactivate the compressor (activation is indi-
cated by the LED on the button turning on).
The system remembers that the compressor
has been turned off, even after the engine
has stopped.
Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO
MODE (AUTO LED will turn off). To restore
automatic control of compressor, push the
AUTO button again.
NOTE:
With the compressor off, air cannot be intro-
duced to the passenger compartment with a
temperature lower than the outside tempera-
ture. Under certain environmental condi-
tions, windows could fog rapidly since the air
is not dehumidified.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost Func-
tion)
Push the MAX-defrost button to activate
(LED on) the windshield and side window
demisting function.
The Climate Control system carries out the
following operations:
• Turns on the air conditioning compressor
when environmental conditions are suit-
able.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
• Turns air recirculation off.
• Sets blower fan to the maximum speed.
• Directs air flow to windshield and front side
window diffusers.
When the Recirculation Control or AUTO but-
tons are pushed, the Climate Control system
will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF)
function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only
windshield distribution activates the Climate
Control system compressor and the air recir-
culation is set to outside air intake.
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at
the windows. Max-defrost is also available in
manual mode.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost
button to turn the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the
rear defrost indicator light on the instrument
panel turning on. If equipped, push the rear
defrost button to activate the defrosting of
door mirrors and heated rear window.
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear win-
dow defroster heating filaments do not
affix stickers or other objects to the inside
of the rear glass.
Turning Off The Climate Control System
Push the ON/OFF button.
With the Climate Control system off:
• Air recirculation is on, isolating the passen-
ger compartment from the outside.
• The A/C compressor is off.
• The blower is off.
• The heated rear window can be
activated/deactivated.
NOTE:
The Climate Control unit stores the tempera-
tures set before the system was turned off
and restores them when one of the following
knobs/buttons is pushed:
• A/C
• Recirculation
• Max Defrost
• Blower Increase
• AUTO
To restart the Climate Control system in fully
automatic mode, push the AUTO button.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must
be turned on at least once a month for ap-
proximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized
dealership before the summer.
NOTE:
This AC system uses R1234yf Refrigerant.
41
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate
the air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-
midified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press
the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning
and manually adjust the blower and airflow
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode and in-
crease blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the ra-
diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in-
sects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cool-
ing performance. Press and release to toggle
between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The
button illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Pressing blower speed, temperature, recircu-
lation, or mode settings, will cause the MAX
A/C operation to switch to the selected set-
ting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC
panel. The system regulates the amount
of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the
driver, and passenger temperatures. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system
to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The fan will engage immediately if
the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing
the front blower knob setting.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro-
vide proper corrosion protection and to pro-
tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and de-
froster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and
the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recircula-
tion mode during Winter months is not rec-
ommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure ad-
equate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel
to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instru-
ments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
CAUTION!
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the
air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust
and pollen from the air. Contact an autho-
rized dealer to service your cabin air filter,
and to have it replaced when needed.
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The power window switch is located on the
driver’s door panel. The driver’s power win-
dow switch controls the operation of all the
windows.
43
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window con-
trols will operate only when the ignition is in
the ON or RUN position.
NOTE:
• If the Remote Start functionality is active,
it is not possible to move any windows.
• The power window switches will remain
active for up to three minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Push the Window Lockout switch to disable
rear passenger window controls. When this
feature is active, the LED light will illuminate
and only the driver can operate the rear
passenger windows. To undo this feature,
push the switch again and the LED will turn
off.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a ve-
hicle, and do not let children play with
WARNING!
power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
front and rear passenger doors window
switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for half a
second and release. The window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way
down during the Auto-Down operation, pull
up or push down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way (manually),
push the window switch down briefly and
release.
Power Window Switches
1 — Window Lockout Switch (Rear
Doors)
2 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Rear
Window
3 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Front
Window
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse
Protection — If Equipped
The driver door power window switch and the
front passenger door window switch have an
Auto-Up feature.
Pull the window switch up, for about half a
second, and release and the window will go
up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way (manually), pull
the window switch up briefly and release it.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle
and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions
may trigger the auto-reverse function unex-
pectedly during auto-closure. If this hap-
pens, pull the switch and hold to close the
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when
the window is almost closed. To avoid
personal injury be sure to clear your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
ception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-
hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This
is a normal occurrence and can be mini-
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear win-
dows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER MY SKY SUN ROOF
Power My Sky Operation
Open/Close The Front Panel
The power My Sky switches are located on the
overhead console. The switches are used to
open and close the front panel.
To automatically retract the front panel to the
open position, push the open/close button
and release. From the fully open position,
pull the open/close switch and release. The
front panel will close completely.
To stop the movement of the front panel
during automatic closing or opening, briefly
push the open/close switch.
Venting The Front Panel
To vent the front panel push and release the
vent switch.
During the vent operation any push on the
open/close switch will stop the closing of the
panel.
45
NOTE:
• If the My Sky is in open position, the vent
switch must be held until the panel vents.
• The power roof controls will operate only
when the ignition is in the ON or RUN
position.
• If the Remote Start functionality is active,
it will not be possible to move the roof.
Auto-Reverse Feature
The front panel of the retractable roof is
equipped with a auto-reverse safety system
that is able to detect the presence of an
obstacle during the opening and closing mo-
tion of the panel.
When this event occurs, the front panel stops
and reverses immediately.
NOTE:
With both panels removed the retractable
roof cannot be opened or closed.
Sunroof Reinitialization
The following procedure must be followed to
reinitialize the sunroof and calibrate obstacle
detection:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
2. Push and hold the front panel close
switch until the sunroof panel is fully
closed, then release the switch.
3. Open the driver side front door.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. After 10 seconds, place the ignition back
in the RUN position.
6. Push and hold the front panel close
switch again. The reinitialization process
will begin within 10 seconds. Do not re-
lease the switch.
7. The sunroof will stop and an audible
“click” will be heard.
8. Release the front panel close switch, then
push and hold it again within 5 seconds.
Do not release the switch.
9. As the front panel close switch is held, the
sunroof panel will cycle to the fully open
position and then back to the fully closed
position again.
10. Once all sunroof motion has stopped,
release the front panel close switch.
Sunroof reinitialization and obstacle
calibration is now complete.
NOTE:
If the switch is released prior to the sunroof
completing the above procedure, the entire
process must be repeated.
Emergency Open/Close
If the Power My Sky switch fails, the retract-
able roof can be operated manually as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the protective cap located on the
inner lining.
2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that
is supplied in the tool bag in the cargo
area.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the
key hole and turn it clockwise to open the
roof or counter-clockwise to close.
CAUTION!
• When refitting panels, be careful to
avoid fingers, scarves, ties and items of
clothing from getting caught under the
panels themselves.
• Do not open the roof in the presence of
snow or ice. There is risk of damage.
POWER GLASS SUNROOF
WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located be-
tween the sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
WARNING!
sible to children. Do not leave the igni-
tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Occu-
pants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power
sunroof while operating the power sun-
roof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an
open sunroof. You could also be seri-
ously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate
the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object, to proj-
ect through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Sunshade Open/Close
2 — Power Sunroof Open/Close
3 — Venting Sunroof
47
Opening
Opening Sunroof
To retract the sunroof to the open position,
push the Open/Close switch and the sunroof
will fully open. The sunroof can be stopped in
any position by pushing/pulling the switch a
second time while is opening.
Venting Sunroof
To vent the sunroof push the Vent switch.
NOTE:
The vent switch has the automatic function
only at the opening of the sunroof. During the
closing of the sunroof, the switch must be
held until closed.
Closing
Closing Sunroof
To close the sunroof completely, pull the
Open/Close switch and the sunroof will fully
close. The sunroof can be stopped in any
position by pushing/pulling the switch a sec-
ond time while it is closing.
Power Sun Shade
Opening Power Shade — Automatic Mode
Push the shade switch for about one-half
second and the shade will automatically
open. During the automatic open operation,
any movement of the shade switch will stop
the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade part way (manually), push
the shade switch briefly and release.
Closing Power Shade — Automatic Mode
Pull the shade switch for about one-half sec-
ond and the shade will automatically close.
During the automatic close operation, any
movement of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade part way (manually), pull
the shade switch briefly and release.
NOTE:
• The sunroof and the shade controls will
operate only when the ignition is in the ON
or RUN position.
• If the Remote Start functionality is active,
it is not possible to move the sunroof.
Auto Reverse Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during the Automatic
Close operation. If an obstruction in the path
of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs.
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof.
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, and do not leave the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
48
WARNING!
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-
less Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an
open sunroof. You could also be severely
injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate
the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft
cloth to clean the glass panel.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and
push the safety latch release lever toward
the passenger side of the vehicle. The
hood release lever is located behind the
center front edge of the hood.
Remove the support rod from the locking tab
and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is
locked into position.
To Close The Hood
Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the
other hand, remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam
the hood to close it. Lower hood to approxi-
Hood Release Lever
49
CAUTION!
mately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the
hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive ve-
hicle unless hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or
activate the power door lock switches located
on the driver door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with
one fluid motion.
The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is
built into the Electronic Liftgate release.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the Liftgate, push the Electronic
Liftgate release to open with one fluid mo-
tion.
Emergency Opening
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fold the rear seats forward.
3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located
under cargo floor in tool kit), remove the
yellow tab.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab
slot to trigger the release tab of the
liftgate.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle
when the liftgate reaches self closing posi-
tion.
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate
may be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button lo-
cated to the right of the outside handle re-
lease will lock the vehicle.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release.
Liftgate Release/Passive Entry
1 — Liftgate Handle
2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
50
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Power Outlet
The 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located
under the HVAC controls in front of the gear
selector. The power outlet can power mobile
phones, electronics and other low power de-
vices.
NOTE:
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-
ceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter
outlet located on the back of the center
console. This outlet can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power de-
vices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
• To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in
the device. The outlet automatically turns
off when the device is unplugged.
Front Power Outlet
Body Computer Fuses
F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel
Power Outlet
Power Inverter
51
NOTE:
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
will automatically shut down. Once the elec-
trical device has been removed from the
outlet, the inverter should automatically re-
set. If the power rating exceeds approxi-
mately 170 Watts, the power inverter may
have to be reset manually. To reset the in-
verter manually, unplug the device and plug
it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:
• insert any objects into the receptacles
• touch with wet hands
Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet
is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof
Luggage Rack for transporting accessories.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
cargo is placed on the Roof Luggage Rack.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at a authorized
dealer through Mopar parts. External racks do
not increase the total load carrying capacity
of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the
load on the Roof Luggage Rack, do not ex-
ceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distrib-
uted over the cargo area.
Do not use the retractable roof when using
the crossbars.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured
loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at
high speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum
roof rack load capacity. Always distrib-
ute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the wind-
shield, should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection be-
tween the surface of the roof and the
load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying large or
heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
52
CAUTION!
forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward
loads. It is recommended to not carry
large flat loads, such as wood panels or
surfboards, which may result in damage
to the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross
bars first, with tie down loops used as
additional securing points if needed. Tie
loops are intended as supplementary tie
down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the
load remains securely attached.
53
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful in-
formation to the driver. With the ignition in
the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument clus-
ter display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they
aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make se-
lections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on
the left side of the steering wheel allows the
driver to select vehicle information and Per-
sonal Settings.
• Push the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menus and submenus
(Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist,
Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Messages,
Screen Set Up).
• Push the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver
Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Mes-
sages, Screen Set Up).
• Push the right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the back/left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item. Push and hold the OK
arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be
reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through Menus And
Submenus
2 — Arrow Right/Left Access Information/
Submenu Screens
3 — OK Button For Selecting And Resetting
Information
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
54
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Due” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you turn the ignition is
cycled to the ON or RUN position. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after per-
forming the scheduled maintenance), refer to
the following procedure:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push
the ENGINE START/STOP button and
cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push
the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. See an authorized
dealer to have the oil life reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument clus-
ter. Menu items may vary depending on your
vehicle features.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
•
Speedometer
• Stop & Start – If
Equipped
•
Vehicle Info
•
Audio
•
Driver Assist
•
Messages
•
Fuel Economy
•
Screen Setup
•
Trip
•
Settings
NOTE:
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
information.
55
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip computer is used to display informa-
tion on car operation when the key is turned
to the RUN position.
This function allows you to define two sepa-
rate trips called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where
the car's "complete trips" are monitored in an
independent manner.
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new
trip). To perform a reset, push and hold the
OK button on the steering wheel controls.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the
figures relating to:
• Distance Travelled
• Average Consumption
• Travel Time (driving time)
Quantities Displayed
Distance Travelled
• Indicates the distance travelled by the start
of the new trip.
Average Consumption
• Represents the average fuel consumption
since the start of the new trip.
Travel Time
• Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
OK Button
Short Push Of The Button: display of various
parameters.
Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities
and begin a new trip.
New trip
Starts after reset:
• "Manual" by pushing the OK button.
• "Automatic" when the "distance" reaches
the value of 62140 (99999.9 km) or when
the "time travel" reaches the value of
999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes).
• After each disconnection and reconnection
of the battery.
WARNING/INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be con-
sidered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner
Manual, which you are advised to read care-
fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa-
tion in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication.
All active telltales will display first, if appli-
cable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure they
work. If any lamps remain on after starting
your vehicle, refer to the respective system
warning lamp for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
56
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the
light is either not on during startup, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes
on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
— Brake Warning Light
(English)
— Brake Warning Light (Met-
ric)
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking
brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder
reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy-
draulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condi-
tion has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in
either half of the dual brake system is indi-
cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a speci-
fied level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have
service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair
is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is re-
quired.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.
57
The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illumi-
nate, have the light inspected by your autho-
rized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
— Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Start-
ing And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is run-
ning, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely
and completely stopped and the transmission
is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains on with
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually
be drivable; however, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the ve-
hicle is running, immediate service is re-
quired and you may experience reduced per-
formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing.
The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If
the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
— Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
an overheated engine condition. If the engine
coolant temperature is too high, this light will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
58
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to nor-
mal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the lift-
gate is left open and not fully closed.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when
this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Pressure Sensor Failure
Warning Light
This light will illuminate if there is a failure of
the oil pressure sensor. If this light illumi-
nates, take it to an authorized dealer and
have them inspect it.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuck-
led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or
remain on continuously and a chime will
sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
— Transmission Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster display
and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault.
Contact your authorized dealer if the message
remains after restarting the engine.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
59
Yellow Warning Lights
— Active Speed Limiter Fault Indica-
tor Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
when there is a fault detected with the Active
Speed Limiter.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local
authorized dealer for service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Oper-
ating.”
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warn-
ing Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system in-
spected by an authorized dealer.
— Audio System Failure Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate to report a failure of
the Audio System. Contact an authorized
dealership as soon as possible.
— Electronic Park Brake Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indi-
cator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
— Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road
condition.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on,
and remain on until fuel is added.
— LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver
with visual and steering torque warnings
when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane
unintentionally without the use of a turn
signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
60
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indica-
tor changes from solid white/green to flash-
ing yellow.
• Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and re-
quires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indica-
tor Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on
when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may
flash to alert serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe
catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this
occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher tem-
peratures than in normal operating condi-
tions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam-
age to the vehicle control system. It also
could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
SER
V
4WD
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend
you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning Sys-
tem. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
61
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message
is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con-
sumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compro-
CAUTION!
mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedi-
cated tire repair kit and contact an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This se-
quence will continue upon subsequent ve-
hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
62
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve-
hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-
ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
— Towing Hook Breakdown Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light
This light indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer tow-
ing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission
into PARK and run the engine at idle or
slightly higher until the light turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides
a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-
creased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive op-
eration and proper use.
— 4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive LOCK mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
63
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion on four-wheel drive operation and proper
use.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the
“ESC Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-
ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is
in an ESC event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
— Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a
malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
— Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the system has
shut the fuel off.
— Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel
cutoff failure. If this light illuminates, take it
to an authorized dealer and have them in-
spect it.
— Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical
Alarm Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle
security alarm system has detected an at-
tempt to break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Warning Light
could illuminate if a problem with the system
is detected. This condition will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
64
SER
V
4WD
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend
you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
White Indicator Lights
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed
is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
— Light Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is light
sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have
an authorized dealer inspect it.
— Speed Warning Indicator Light — If
Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the
speed warning telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster with a number matching
the set speed. When the set speed is ex-
ceeded, a single chime will sound along with
pop up message of “Speed Warning Ex-
ceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned on
and off in the instrument cluster display, for
further information refer to “Instrument Clus-
ter Display Menu Items” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel.”
The number “55” is only an example of a
speed that can be set.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear
of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If
the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
Green Indicator Lights
— Automatic High Beam Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high
beam headlights are on.
— Speed Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the speed control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-
ther information.
65
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
— Hazard Warning Lights
The hazard warning indicators light up when
the vehicles Hazard Warning flasher switch
has been pushed.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
park lights or headlights are turned on.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
Gray Indicator Lights
— Electronic Speed Control Ready/
Canceled Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control function is ready (but not set),
or cancelled, by the driver. Refer to "Speed
Control — If Equipped" in "Starting and Op-
erating" for further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmis-
sion control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diag-
nostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is
running, severe catalytic converter dam-
age and power loss will soon occur. Im-
mediate service is required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
66
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of ve-
hicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING!
• Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal infor-
mation.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecu-
rity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal require-
ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass
could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspec-
tion and Maintenance (I/M), this
check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that
the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your
vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a
dead battery or a battery replacement. If the
OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated
test, which you can use prior to going to the
test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will
have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
67
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of
two things will happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the igni-
tion in the off position or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II sys-
tem is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If
your vehicle was recently serviced or had a
battery failure or replacement, you may need
to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as
you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above
test routine may then indicate that the sys-
tem is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi-
nated during normal vehicle operation you
should have your vehicle serviced before go-
ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
68
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-
mance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en-
sure that the ABS is working properly each
time the vehicle is started and driven. During
this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to
run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated elec-
tronic equipment that may be suscep-
tible to interference caused by improp-
erly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such
equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may
lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
WARNING!
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM
tires. Modification may result in degraded
ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
will turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re-
mains on or comes on while driving, it indi-
cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is
69
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,
the brake system should be serviced as soon
as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec-
tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stabil-
ity and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), and Hill Descent Control
(HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emer-
gency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re-
sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stop-
ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
WARNING!
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to help the
driver accelerate the vehicle from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA
will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system
will release brake pressure and the vehicle
will roll down the hill as normal. The system
will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied.
The following conditions must be met in
order for HSA to activate:
• The vehicle must be stopped.
SAFETY
70
• The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)
grade or greater hill.
• The gear selection must match vehicle up-
hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, the HSA will work in RE-
VERSE gear and all forward gears. The
system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake op-
eration to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of
WARNING!
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Disabling and Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as fol-
lows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument
cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take
the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the
sway. The system may reduce engine power
and apply the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
TSC will become active automatically once
an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information. When
TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC sys-
tem is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
71
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will
start to flash as soon as the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be-
gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can-
not prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent accidents re-
sulting from loss of vehicle control due
to inappropriate driver input for the con-
ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skill-
ful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop-
erly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your ve-
WARNING!
hicle, and may negatively affect the per-
formance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, brak-
ing system, tire type and size or wheel
size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that re-
duces the effectiveness of the ESC sys-
tem can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per-
sonal injury and death.
ESC Operation Modes
To disable ESC and other safety systems,
follow the instruction below.
There are three modes of active safety sys-
tems present on the vehicle:
• ESC On
• Partial Off
• Full Off
SAFETY
72
ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four
Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC
when operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It
is also the normal mode for operating a four-
wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH
range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”
mode whenever the vehicle is started or the
power transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted
out of 4WD LOW range. This mode should be
used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off”
for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Par-
tial Off” and to “Full Off” for additional
information.
NOTE:
It is recommended to select the mode "Partial
Off" or "Full Off" only for specific reasons.
Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four
Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High
Range
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving
in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode
raises the threshold for TCS and ESC activa-
tion, which allows for more wheel spin than
what ESC normally allows.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” button and the ESC Off
indicator light will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light
will turn off. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momen-
tarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. Once the
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is over-
come, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the lim-
ited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi-
nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta-
ESC OFF Button
73
WARNING!
bility offered by the ESC system is re-
duced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD
High And 4WD Low Range
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-
highway and off-road use when ESC stability
features could inhibit vehicle maneuverabil-
ity due to trail conditions. The “ESC Off”
button is located in the lower switch bank
above the climate control panel. To enter
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC
Off” button for five seconds while the vehicle
is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will
illuminate and an “ESC Off” message will
appear in the odometer.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off
(except for the “limited slip” feature de-
scribed in the TCS section) until the vehicle
reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system
automatically switches to “Partial Off” mode,
described above. When the vehicle speed
returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the
ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode.
The ESC OFF indicator light is always illumi-
nated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” button. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE:
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail-
able. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
taining stability. “Full Off” mode is only in-
tended for off-highway or off-road use.
NOTE:
• “Full Off” is the only operating mode for
ESC in 4WD LOW range. The ESC system
will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is
started in 4WD LOW range or the power
transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW
range.
• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a
chime will sound when the gear selector is
moved from any position to the PARK posi-
tion and then moved out of the PARK posi-
tion. This will occur even if the message
was cleared previously.
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the
activation of some driving modes provide
partial off or full off of some active safety
systems in order to optimize performance in
specific modes.
Partial or full off of the active safety systems
will be indicated by a light in the instrument
cluster.
In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety sys-
tems are partially disabled and put in place to
ensure maximum performance in the specific
mode of operation. However, you can reacti-
vate them completely at any time by pushing
the ESC button.
NOTE:
In 4WD LOW, the active safety systems are
completely bypassed in order to ensure maxi-
mum off-road performance.
SAFETY
74
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the en-
gine running, a malfunction has been de-
tected in the ESC system. If this light re-
mains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles/
kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster)
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac-
tion and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when Traction Control
System is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelera-
tor and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be ON even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-
ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
The "ESC OFF Indicator Light"
indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is partially off or
full off.
The ESC OFF switch is located in the center
console.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.
When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehi-
cle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors,
such as road conditions, leaving the roadway,
or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
75
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions, and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitiga-
tion (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be ex-
ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel
spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel
spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to
the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS system,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and con-
trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial
Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
The DST function uses the integration of the
ESC system with the electric power steering
to increase the safety level of the whole car.
In critical situations (understeering, over-
steering, braking with different grip condi-
tions), through the DST function the ESC
system controls the steering to implement an
additional torque contribution on the steering
wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver
to the driver. The coordinated action of
brakes and steering increases the safety and
car control feeling.
NOTE:
The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the
car.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driv-
ing while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls ve-
hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
SAFETY
76
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
• Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
• Driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate auto-
matically if driven down a grade of sufficient
magnitude (greater than approximately 8%).
The set speed for HDC is selectable by the
driver and can be adjusted using brake and
throttle input.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi-
cient magnitude (less than approximately
8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any
of the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• Driver’s door opens.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and
the HDC switch has an LED which offer feed-
back to the driver about the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu-
minate and remain solid when HDC is en-
abled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
• The switch lamp will flash for several sec-
onds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC switch when enable con-
ditions have not been met.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the
Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right
position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descend-
ing hills. The driver must remain attentive
to the driving conditions and is responsible
for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
77
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
uses two radar-based sensors, located inside
the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mo-
torcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both out-
side rear view mirrors to let the driver know
that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters
stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approxi-
mately one lane width on both sides of the
vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone length starts at
the outside mirror and extends approximately
20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-
tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when
the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
• If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is
necessary to deactivate BSM system manu-
ally by settings menu to avoid a misdetec-
tion. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the radar sensors located on the rear
fascia with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects
in the detection zones by illuminating the
BSM warning light located in the outside
mirrors in addition to sounding an audible
(chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further
information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is nec-
essary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
SAFETY
78
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your ve-
hicle on either side and enter the rear detec-
tion zone with a relative speed of less than
31 mph (50 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a
relative speed less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (25 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects
that are traveling in the opposite direction of
the vehicle in adjacent lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only
an aid to help detect objects in the blind
spot zones. The BSM system is not de-
signed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your
vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoul-
der, and use your turn signal before chang-
ing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in-
tended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncom-
ing vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly
and cautiously out of the parking space until
the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are
moving toward the side of the vehicle with a
minimum speed of approximately 1 mph
(2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles
can be obscured by vehicles parked on either
side. If the sensors are blocked by other
structures or vehicles, the system will not be
able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in RE-
VERSE, the driver is alerted using both the
visual and audible alarms, including reduc-
ing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
back up aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming
vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even
when using RCP. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
79
WARNING!
spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a de-
tected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is pres-
ent. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an
audible chime will also be sounded. When-
ever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time,
both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert, the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there
will be a related message on instrument clus-
ter display. If BSM system is off, this mes-
sage will be visualized every time the vehicle
is restarted.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current oper-
ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Sensor Blinded
In the case of a sensor blinded:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on
continuously.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message
will display.
NOTE:
The rear bumper must be clean and free of
any obstructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporary
unavailable:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on
continuously.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message
will display.
SAFETY
80
In the case of the system being completely
unavailable:
• A chime will sound.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message
will display.
NOTE:
Vehicle must be taken to the nearest autho-
rized dealer for service.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System
with Mitigation provides the driver with au-
dible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
• FCW monitors the information from the
forward looking sensors as well as the Elec-
tronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate
the probability of a forward collision. When
the system determines that a forward colli-
sion is probable, the driver will be provided
with audible and visual warnings and may
provide a brake jerk warning.
• If the driver does not take action based
upon these progressive warnings, then the
system will provide a limited level of active
braking to help slow the vehicle and miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the
driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver in-
tends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide addi-
tional brake force as required.
Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After
the end of the intervention of automatic brak-
ing, the engine could stall, unless the driver
can depress the clutch pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After
the end of the intervention of automatic brak-
ing, the transmission may remain in last gear
stored: therefore the vehicle could lurch for-
ward, once the brakes release a few seconds
later. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
81
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 26 mph
(42 km/h), the system may provide the maxi-
mum braking possible to mitigate the poten-
tial forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the ve-
hicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal
FCW activation and functionality.
•
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent un-
necessary warnings to the surroundings.
• If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, the
FCW system will be automatically deacti-
vated.
• The active braking is disabled when a
trailer is connected with a Mopar Trailer
Towing system. If the vehicle is equipped
with an aftermarket system, it is recom-
mended that the Active Braking is turned
off manually.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own,
nor can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility
to avoid a collision by controlling the ve-
hicle via braking and steering. Failure to
follow this warning could lead to serious
injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located
in the Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Warning +
Active Braking,” this allows the system to
warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you and enable the active
braking.
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” deacti-
vates the system, so no warning or active
braking will be available in case of a pos-
sible collision
• Changing the FCW status to “Only warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support
if the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the status of the system is only
possible with the vehicle at a complete stop.
SAFETY
82
NOTE:
The FCW system state is not kept in memory
from one ignition position to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will turn on when the
vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the
Uconnect system, you can change the sensi-
tivity of the system by choosing one of the
following three options: "Near", "Medium" or
"Far". Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The default option is "Medium". This setting
provides that the system notify the driver of a
possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it
when the latter is at a standard distance,
intermediate between the other two possible
settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to
"Far", the system will warn the driver of a
possible accident with the vehicle in front
when the latter is at a greater distance, giving
you the chance to act on the brakes in a more
limited and gradual. This setting gives the
driver the maximum possible time of reaction
to prevent a possible accident.
By changing the option to "Near", the system
will warn the driver of a possible accident
with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is
a reduced distance. This setting offers a
reaction time to the driver lower than the
settings "Medium" and "Far", in the case of a
potential accident, while a more dynamic
driving of the vehicle.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is
maintained in memory when the engine is
switched off.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW
Limited Functionality” or “FCW Limited
Functionality Wipe Front Windshield” mo-
mentarily, there may be a condition that lim-
its FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the
active braking may not be fully available.
Once the condition that limited the system
performance is no longer present, the system
will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads:
• FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system
fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
“FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
Warning
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning will display when condi-
tions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor vis-
ibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The
system may also become temporarily blinded
due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice.
In these cases, the instrument cluster display
will read “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporar-
ily Blocked” and the system will deactivate.
83
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” message can sometimes be dis-
played while driving in highly reflective areas
(i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The system will recover after the ve-
hicle has left these areas. Under rare condi-
tions, when the radar is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the
driver should examine the sensor. It may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
In absence of visible obstructions on the
bumper, it could be necessary to wipe off the
radar directly on the surface, after having the
radar cover removed. It’s recommended that
your authorized dealer perform this opera-
tion.
NOTE:
• If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporar-
ily Blocked” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow or front-end protec-
tor is not recommended. Doing so may
block the sensor and inhibit FCW opera-
tion.
• Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not
use solvents or abrasive pastes.
• The radar is equipped with a defrost sys-
tem, so in some climatic conditions it could
reach high temperatures. Wait at least
30 seconds after the engine has been
cycled OFF before touching the sensor.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
In certain driving conditions, such as:
• Driving in the vicinity of a curve
• Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the
lane
• Lane changing of other vehicles
• Passing of vehicles in an oncoming
intersection
The intervention of the system could be un-
expected or delayed. The driver must there-
fore always pay particular attention, while
maintaining control of the vehicle to drive in
complete safety.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system
could detect the presence of a vehicle that is
in front of the vehicle, but that does not
preside in the same lane. In cases such as
this, the system might respond.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence
of vehicles that are in front of the vehicle but
placed outside the field of action of the radar
sensor and could therefore not react in the
presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
motorcycles.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while
standing in the traffic lane of their vehicle
and inside the field of action of the radar
sensor may cause the intervention of the
system.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersec-
tion
The system could temporarily react to a ve-
hicle that crossed the range of the radar
sensor, in an oncoming intersection.
SAFETY
84
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold
placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natu-
ral pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition
exists, and will not turn off until the tire
pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres-
sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the
tire pressure to the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off once the system receives the updated
tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa).
If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
85
will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-
mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the ve-
hicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
CAUTION!
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The
TPM sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels, and may contribute
to a poor overall system performance.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
wheels to assure TPMS feature opera-
tion.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to
have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-
mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro-
vide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon-
sibility to maintain correct tire pressure
using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even
if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
TPMS information on your instrument
cluster.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
SAFETY
86
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper
pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
ings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light” will illuminate in the in-
strument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the in-
strument cluster, an "Inflate to XX" message
will be displayed and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value as
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once
the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn off when the fault condition
no longer exists. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-
ing next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size spare tire does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-
matching full size spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and "Inflate to
XX" messages will turn on upon the next
ignition cycle.
87
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a
chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare or non-
matching full size spare, the TPMS will
update automatically and the “TPMS Tell-
tale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Tire Pressure Monitor System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper
pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
ings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light” will illuminate in the in-
strument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "Tire
Low" message for a minimum of five seconds
and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pres-
sure (those in a different color in the instru-
ment cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value as
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warning
SAFETY
88
the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update,
the pressure values in the graphic display in
the instrument cluster will return to their
original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any
of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-
ing next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and
tire assembly has a tire pressure monitor-
ing sensor that can be monitored by the
TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of
a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.
In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a Tire Low message, an "Inflate to
XX" message and a graphic showing the
low tire pressure value in a different color.
3.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pres-
sure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires.
4. The instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the tire pressure value in
the same color as the other pressure val-
ues in place of the different color low tire
pressure value. The instrument cluster
will also display a dedicated message to
remind you to service the flat tire.
89
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the com-
pact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-
matching full size spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a dif-
ferent color pressure value and an "Inflate
to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will dis-
play a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid, and the instru-
ment cluster will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare or non-
matching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will dis-
play a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)
with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing
Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, re-
place all four wheel and tire assemblies (road
tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 sec-
onds and then remain on and the instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display dashes (--)
in place of the pressure values. Beginning
with the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or flash the TPM telltale
and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster display
but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive
SAFETY
90
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off, and the instru-
ment cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster
will also display pressure values in place of
the dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system
fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information
in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and
your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of
a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further in-
formation) must be secured in the appro-
priate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint (Refer to “Child Re-
straints” in this section for further
information).
91
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a dis-
abled person, refer to “Customer Assis-
tance” for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear
seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a
collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst
injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in
a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Front And Rear Seat BeltAlert (If Equipped)
Front Seat BeltAlert
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert fea-
ture is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the respec-
tive Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn solid
red and remain red until the seat belt is
buckled. The respective Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn solid green once the seat belt
is buckled. After the driver and outboard
SAFETY
92
front seat passenger have buckled their seat
belts all Seat Belt Reminder Lights will turn
off. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger is unbuckled (the
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the respective
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warn-
ing sequence has completed, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will remain solid red until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence
may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat pas-
senger seat belts are buckled. The driver
should instruct all occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will
begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It
is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
Rear Seat BeltAlert
Rear Seat BeltAlert shows the driver whether
the seat belts in the rear seat are buckled or
unbuckled. When the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position, a Seat Belt Re-
minder Light turns on for each rear seat
position. If a seat belt is buckled, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light for that position will
illuminate solid green for a few seconds, and
then turn off. If a seat belt is unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate red
for a few seconds, and then turn off. If the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and a rear passenger unbuckles
a seat belt that was buckled at the start of the
trip, an intermittent chime will sound, and
the Seat Belt Reminder Light for that position
will change from solid green to blinking red.
This will alert the driver to stop the vehicle
until the rear passenger buckles the seat belt
again. When the rear passenger buckles the
seat belt, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
change to solid green for a few seconds,
before turning off.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until the driver and outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled.
93
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat
belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can
strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of
WARNING!
the vehicle. Always be sure you and
others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc-
cupants, including the driver, should al-
ways wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seat-
ing position to minimize the risk of se-
vere injury or death in the event of a
crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
WARNING!
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve-
hicle, take it to an authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
SAFETY
94
WARNING!
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop,
you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your
seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-
sion, increasing head and neck injury. A
seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear
WARNING!
your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder
belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your ab-
domen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Buckle
2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
95
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as pos-
sible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat
belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in
a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
SAFETY
96
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-
age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor-
age until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wear-
ing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the
arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is
equipped with pretensioning devices that are
designed to remove slack from the seat belt in
the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by
removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size oc-
cupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi-
tioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
97
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is
equipped with an Energy Management fea-
ture that may help further reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is de-
signed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used
to secure a child restraint system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un-
der the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the lock-
ing feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far
enough to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the
ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click.”
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in
a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear
seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
SAFETY
98
WARNING!
seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disen-
gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti-
vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Re-
WARNING!
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly
when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing
the seat belt or children who are using
booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a har-
ness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir-
cuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system when-
ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START
99
or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition
switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system
even if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when
the ignition switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single
chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected
that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on during the four to eight seconds when
the ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-
gine related gauges are not working, the Oc-
cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also
be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
WARNING!
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
SAFETY
100
For additional information regarding the Re-
dundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section
of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/
shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supple-
ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
WARNING!
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear
seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul-
tistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to
the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1—
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
101
(ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or
other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immedi-
ately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in
less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle
switch that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver
and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
WARNING!
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cush-
ions are designed to open only when the
air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indica-
tors of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air
SAFETY
102
bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm
lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instru-
ment panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact
by working together with the seat belts, pre-
tensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the
seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts,
in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim
cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the
seat seam into the space between the occu-
pant and the door. The SAB moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag
103
where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-
tains (SABICs) are located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is
labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided
by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the
side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way
and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they
are not belted and seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-
pants through side windows in certain side
impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack lug-
gage or other cargo up high enough to
block the deployment of the SABICs.
The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deploy-
ment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as in-
tended, do not install any accessory
items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SAFETY
104
WARNING!
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-
ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap-
propriate response to impact events. The sys-
tem is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant
protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact de-
ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-
side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at cer-
tain angles, or some side collisions that do
not impact the area of the passenger com-
partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags
can be seriously injured or killed. Occu-
pants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your pro-
tection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an in-
flating Side Air Bag. To get the best
protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly
and sit upright with their backs against
WARNING!
the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster
seat that is appropriate for the size of the
child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to
be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a colli-
sion. The Side Air Bags work with your
seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
105
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain rollover events. The ORC determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indi-
cator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in
progress and whether deployment is appro-
priate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deploy-
ment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the
rollover sensing system will also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-
pants through side windows in certain roll-
over or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with electrical Air
Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in
all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the
air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc-
cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blis-
tering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gen-
erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irri-
tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
SAFETY
106
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area
with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-
sioners cannot protect you in another col-
lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten-
sioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communica-
tion network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of
the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for 15
minutes from the intervention of the En-
hanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to
the Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circu-
lation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position
and remove the key from the ignition switch
to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com-
partment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there
are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
107
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is
active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is
displayed. Turn the ignition switch from igni-
tion AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ig-
nition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compart-
ment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left
and right turn signal lights, located in the
instrument panel, may both be blinking and
will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE
held for at least two
seconds
1. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
(Turn Signal Switch
Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn
signal switch ON.
Right turn light is
ON SOLID.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal
in neutral state.
Right turn light is
OFF.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn sig-
nal switch ON.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is
ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal
in neutral state.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE
held for at least two
seconds
7. Turn right turn
signal switch ON.
Right turn light is
ON SOLID.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal
in neutral state.
Right turn light is
OFF.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn sig-
nal switch ON.
Right turn light is
ON SOLID.
Left turn light is
ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn
signal switch OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch
Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is
OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
SAFETY
108
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE
held for at least two
seconds
12. Turn ignition
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
(Entire sequence
needs to be com-
pleted within one
minute or sequence
will need to be re-
peated).
System is now reset
and the engine may
be started.
Turn hazard flashers
OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed
within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights
will blink and the reset procedure must be
performed again in order to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air
WARNING!
bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim
cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the
front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle
that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function prop-
erly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, in-
cluding your trim cover and cushion,
needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be
WARNING!
used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
109
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are re-
corded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and chil-
dren. Every state in the United States, and
every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for
ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail-
able. According to crash statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant
on your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper re-
straint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of re-
straints for children from newborn size to the
child almost large enough for an adult safety
belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow
all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la-
bels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should
also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call 1-888-327-4236.
•
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm.
SAFETY
110
Summary Of Recommendations For Restrain-
ing Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight lim-
its of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of
their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-
point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-
facing child restraint, but are too small to prop-
erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing child re-
straint. Two types of child restraints can be
used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert-
ible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in
the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or
height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil-
dren who have outgrown their infant carrier
but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
111
WARNING!
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear
seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should re-
main in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If
the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could
come loose in a collision. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can
loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before ad-
justing the vehicle seat position. When
WARNING!
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re-
install the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from
the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use
this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
the child is still sitting all the way back?
SAFETY
112
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt
fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
113
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child re-
straint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seat-
ing position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating
positions may have a top tether anchorage
but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child re-
straint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Re-
straints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 An-
chorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
114
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center posi-
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in
the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact. See your child re-
straint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
115
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the
seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to
the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH :
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the
center position using the LATCH system.
This position is not approved for install-
ing child seats using the LATCH attach-
ments. You must use the seat belt and
tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint” for typical
installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child re-
straint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchors
SAFETY
116
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re-
straint
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit.
If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat
belts that are not being used by other occu-
pants or being used to secure child restraints.
An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation, in-
stead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un-
der no circumstances are they to be used
117
WARNING!
for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to
the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Ve-
hicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to prop-
erly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de-
signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR
will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de-
scription in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Re-
straint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
118
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
straint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to prop-
erly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
WARNING!
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an in-
fant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if adjust-
able) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
119
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re-
tract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to
pull out any webbing. If the retractor is
not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-
facing car seat to any location in front of
the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An-
chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING!
Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to
find the tether anchorage. You may need
to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to an-
other position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the an-
chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head re-
SAFETY
120
straints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap un-
der the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-
ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split
rear seat, make sure the tether strap
does not slip into the opening between
the seatbacks as you remove slack in the
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could
harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a colli-
sion.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
121
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con-
tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col-
orless and odorless. Breathing it can make
you unconscious and can eventually poi-
son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
• If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make
sure that all windows are closed and the
climate control BLOWER switch is set at
high speed. DO NOT use the recircula-
tion mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked
vehicle with the engine running, adjust
your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar-
eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Dam-
aged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding
seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this
light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an autho-
rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
SAFETY
122
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on high
speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See an au-
thorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor
mat that is securely attached using the floor
mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position
and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to in-
terfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
WARNING!
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor
mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat
that cannot be properly attached and
secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress
the accelerator, the brake, and the
WARNING!
clutch pedal (if present) to check for
interference. If your floor mat interferes
with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and could cause
a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob-
jects could change the position of the
floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor
mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle
carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
123
WARNING!
check for interference with the accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re-
install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat
has been properly installed and is se-
cured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,
nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the
tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare)
for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and lock-
ing.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or
if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected imme-
diately.
SAFETY
124
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put
the gear selector in the PARK or NEU-
TRAL position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing
the accelerator.
3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and
release it as soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the
ignition in the OFF mode and wait 10-
15 seconds before attempting to restart
the engine.
Stopping The Engine
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push
and hold the ignition or push the START/
STOP button three times consecutively
within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the
RUN position.
Turning OFF the car (cycle the ignition from
the RUN mode to the OFF mode), the power
supply to the accessories are maintained for a
period of three minutes.
NOTE:
If the vehicle fails to shut off using the
ignition, refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition
in RUN will sound a short chime that reminds
the driver to place the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
window switches remains active for three
minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this
function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow
the temperature inside the engine compart-
ment to cool before shutting off the engine.
125
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle)
in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles
(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or
90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contrib-
utes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental
and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving
type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis-
tent with anticipated climate conditions un-
der which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality
grades, refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servic-
ing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during
its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a nor-
mal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE
(EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with a new Electric
Park Brake System (EPB) that offers greater
convenience. The EPB switch is located in
the center console.
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on
the switch momentarily. The BRAKE warning
lamp in the instrument cluster and an indi-
cator on the switch will illuminate.
To release the park brake manually, the igni-
tion switch must be in RUN. Then put your
foot on the brake pedal and push the park
brake switch down momentarily. Once the
park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp and the switch indicator will
extinguish.
Park Brake Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
126
The park brake can also be automatically
released. With the engine running and the
transmission in gear, release the brake pedal
and depress the throttle pedal. For safety
reasons, your seat belt must also be fastened.
NOTE:
• You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages or disengages.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
are engaging or disengaging the parking
brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement.
• The new Auto Park Brake feature can be
used to apply the park brake automatically
every time you park the vehicle. Auto Park
Brake can be enabled and disabled in the
Settings menu in Uconnect or in “Safe
Hold” conditions.
• The parking brake can be engaged even
when the ignition is OFF, however, it can
only be disengaged when the ignition is in
the RUN mode.
• Safehold is a new feature that will auto-
matically apply the park brake under cer-
tain conditions. The EPB monitors the sta-
tus of the driver’s seat belt, driver’s door
and pedal positions to determine if the
driver may have exited while the vehicle is
still capable of moving and will then auto-
matically apply the park brake to prevent
the vehicle from rolling.
• The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the
EPB switch is held for longer than 60 sec-
onds in either the released or applied posi-
tion. The light will extinguish upon releas-
ing the switch.
• Refer to “Electric Park Brake (EPB)” in
“Starting And Operating” located in the
vehicle’s Owner's Manual for further
details.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
WARNING!
Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake
when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll
and cause damage or injury. Also be
certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or in-
jury.
127
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains
on with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is
below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic
transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition
is in the OFF mode. Auto Park Brake is
enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the Customer Programmable Fea-
tures section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can
be bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to
the release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK (automatic transmission)
and the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some
cases, with an automatic transmission, if at
the cycle of key from RUN to the OFF mode
the gear selector is not firmly locked in Park-
ing position, EPB applies automatically even
if Auto Park Brake has been previously dis-
abled.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB sys-
tem that will engage the park brake automati-
cally if the vehicle is left unsecured while the
ignition is in the RUN mode.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will
automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will auto-
matically engage if all of the following condi-
tions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
• The clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door
is open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
mode and back to RUN again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced
by your authorized dealer. You should only
make repairs for which you have the knowl-
edge and the right equipment. You should
only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push
the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With
the electric park brake system, this can only
be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
STARTING AND OPERATING
128
The actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu
based system will guide you through the
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The parking brake must be disabled.
• The transmission must be in park or neu-
tral.
• The EPB switch not activated.
• The vehicle in ignition RUN mode.
• The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition is in
the RUN mode.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the in-
strument cluster if Brake Service Mode can-
not be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the in-
strument cluster if Brake Service Mode can-
not be deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that ser-
vice work for which you have the knowl-
edge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave
the vehicle unattended without having the
parking brake fully applied. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the ve-
hicle on a hill with the clutch pedal par-
tially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmis-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal.
129
To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to
the floor and put the gear selector to the
desired position (the diagram for the engage-
ment of the gears is displayed on the handle
of the lever).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located be-
low the knob and simultaneously move the
lever to the left and then forward.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting
from a standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission effi-
ciently for fuel economy and performance, it
should be upshifted as listed in the recom-
mended shift speed chart. Shift at the ve-
hicle speeds listed for acceleration. When
heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these rec-
ommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
All Engines
Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
REVERSE Ring
STARTING AND OPERATING
130
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmis-
sion is normal. This noise can be most notice-
able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal re-
leased), but it may also be heard when driv-
ing. The noise may also be more noticeable
when the transmission is warm. This noise is
normal and is not an indication of a problem
with your clutch or transmission.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear
is recommended to preserve brakes when
driving down steep hills. In addition, down-
shifting at the right time provides better ac-
celeration when you desire to resume speed.
Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip, and the ve-
hicle could skid.
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into
lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can
damage the engine and clutch systems,
Any attempt to shift into lower gear with
clutch pedal depressed may result dam-
age to the clutch system. Shifting into
lower gear and releasing the clutch may
result in engine damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful
to downshift one gear at a time to pre-
CAUTION!
vent overspeeding the engine which can
cause engine damage, and/or clutch
damage, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed. If transfer case is in low range
the vehicle speeds to cause engine and
clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recom-
mended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with
clutch pedal depressed could result in
clutch damage.
131
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recom-
mended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine to overspeed and/or damage
the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or
downshift at too high of a vehicle speed,
these conditions may cause the engine to
overspeed if too low of a gear is selected
and the clutch pedal is released. Damage
to the clutch and the transmission can
result from skipping a gear while down-
shifting or downshifting at too high of a
vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is
held pressed (i.e., not released).
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the
art, fuel efficient nine-speed transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is dis-
played beside the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster display. To select a gear
range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or
forward. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System" in this section). Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
STARTING AND OPERATING
132
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is run-
ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always
come to a complete stop, then apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
When the ignition is in the OFF mode,
the transmission is locked in PARK, se-
curing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not ob-
served:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
133
Gear Selector
The transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick
(+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control (refer
to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector for-
ward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE position) will
manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position
(when pushed forward) it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In AutoStick mode, the transmis-
sion gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
The nine-speed transmission has been devel-
oped to meet the needs of FCA current and
future lineup of FWD/AWD vehicles. Software
and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel
economy. By design, some vehicle and drive-
line combinations utilize 9th gear only in very
specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and
the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your
foot on the brake pedal when shifting be-
tween these gears.
DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a mo-
ment to allow the selected gear to engage
before accelerating. This is especially im-
portant when the engine is cold.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) by locking the transmission. The
engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the EPB when exiting the ve-
hicle in this range.
Gear Selector Lock Button
STARTING AND OPERATING
134
When parking on a level surface, you may
shift the transmission into PARK first, and
then apply the EPB.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mecha-
nism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on
an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a sub-
stitute for the park brake. Always apply
the park brake fully when exiting the
vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear
selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmis-
sion is in PARK before exiting the ve-
hicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK
if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shift-
ing to PARK, and verify that the trans-
mission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. En-
sure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the ve-
hicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
WARNING!
idling normally (or stopped) and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is running
or the propulsion system is active. Be-
fore exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the park
brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the park brake,
135
WARNING!
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear se-
lector out of PARK, you must turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also
press the brake pedal. Otherwise, dam-
age to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range, as this can damage the
drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock
button on the gear selector, and firmly
move the gear selector all the way forward
until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position dis-
play and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
• With the brake pedal released, verify that
the gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle back-
ward. Shift into REVERSE only after the ve-
hicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing
for prolonged periods with the engine run-
ning. The engine may be started in this range.
Apply the electric park brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn
off the ignition to coast down a hill. These
are unsafe practices that limit your re-
sponse to changing traffic or road condi-
tions. You might lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically up-
shifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving character-
istics under all normal operating conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
136
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this
section for further information) to select a
lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and ex-
tend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds nor-
mal operating limits, the transmission con-
troller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex-
pand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent trans-
mission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot,
the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Light” may illuminate and the transmission
may operate differently until the transmis-
sion cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission op-
eration may be modified depending on en-
gine and transmission temperature as well as
vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch, and shifts into
8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the trans-
mission fluid is warm. Normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slip-
pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE position), it can
be moved forward and rearward. This allows
the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward
(+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the
gear selector rearward (+) or forward (-), ex-
cept as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine over-
speed.
• The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically down-
shift to first or second gear (depending on
model) when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the
transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first or
second gear. Starting out in second gear
can be helpful in snow or icy conditions.
Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to
select the desired gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
137
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not
occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift
at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick
is engaged because the transmission will
not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more notice-
able when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift
in or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the ve-
WARNING!
hicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is electronically moni-
tored for abnormal conditions. If a condition
is detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is
activated. In this mode, the transmission
may operate only in a fixed gear, or may
remain in neutral. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home
Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damag-
ing the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all for-
ward gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if pos-
sible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until
the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the trans-
mission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized
dealer at your earliest possible convenience.
An authorized dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, autho-
rized dealer service is required.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock, which requires the transmission to
be in PARK before the ignition can be turned
to the OFF mode. Also, the transmission is
locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING
138
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans-
mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must
be in the RUN mode (engine running or not)
and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before
pushing the button on the gear selector to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive
Low (4WD Low)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power
Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic
with no driver inputs or additional driving
skills required. Under normal driving condi-
tions, the front wheels provide most of the
traction. If the front wheels begin to lose
traction, power is shifted automatically to the
rear wheels. The greater the front wheel trac-
tion loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and
type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be
used. Unequal tire size may cause failure
of the power transfer unit.
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic
in normal driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of
mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of
75 mph (120 km/h).
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four wheel
drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain
and allow you to select the following:
• 4WD LOCK
• 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
Selec-Terrain Switch
139
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to
ensure immediate availability of torque to the
rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in
AUTO mode and automatic in the other driv-
ing mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
• When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
• When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated
from AUTO to any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk
Models Only)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the
off-road performance in all modes. To enable
4WD Low, please follow the steps below:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in
RUN mode or with the engine running, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and push
the button once 4WD LOW. The instrument
cluster will display the message "4WD LOW"
once the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and
then become active on the Selec-Terrain
switch until the shift is complete.
• The instrument cluster display will illumi-
nate the "4WD Low" icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle
must be stationary and the transmission
shifted into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW
button once.
SELEC-TERRAIN
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of
the vehicle control systems, along with driver
input, to provide the best performance for all
terrains.
Mode Selection Guide
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
Selec-Terrain Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
140
• AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
continuous operation, is fully automatic
and can be used on and off road. This mode
balances traction to ensure maneuverabil-
ity and acceleration improvement com-
pared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This
mode also reduces fuel consumption, since
it allows the disconnect of the drive shaft
where conditions permit.
• SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater
stability under conditions of bad weather.
It's used on and off road and on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered
with snow. When in SNOW mode (depend-
ing on certain operating conditions), the
transmission will use second gear (rather
than first gear) during launches, to mini-
mize wheel slippage, except for in 4–Low
(Trailhawk models only).
• SAND: For off-road driving or use on sur-
faces with poor traction, such as sandy
bottoms. The transmission is set to provide
maximum traction. This mode allows more
wheel spin and higher shift points to help
motor through loose areas.
• MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered by
mud or wet grass.
• ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only
available in 4WD LOW range. The device
sets the vehicle to maximize traction and
allow the highest steering capacity for off-
road surfaces. This mode gives you the
maximum performance off-road. Use for
low speed obstacles such as large rocks,
deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Trailhawk package.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec
Speed Control for steep downhill control.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System”
in “Safety” located in the Owner’s Manual
for further information.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
141
NOTE:
• In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed
to shut down if multiple Speed Control
functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Con-
trol on/off button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
• The Speed Control function will not work in
4WD Low Range.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will
turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could acci-
dentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
hicle will operate at the selected speed.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — RES/Resume
3 — On/Off
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
STARTING AND OPERATING
142
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANC button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the igni-
tion to OFF erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
engaged in light to moderate traffic condi-
tions without the constant need to reset your
cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor
and a forward facing camera designed to
detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle
ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set
speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelera-
tion (not to exceed the original set speed)
automatically to maintain a preset follow-
ing distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a con-
venience system. It is not a substitute
for active driving involvement. It is al-
ways the driver’s responsibility to be at-
tentive of road, traffic, and weather con-
ditions, vehicle speed, distance to the
vehicle ahead; and, most importantly,
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/
Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
143
WARNING!
brake operation to ensure safe operation
of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always re-
quired while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, on-
coming vehicles, and stationary ob-
jects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and
weather conditions into account,
and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which
can result in wrong or missing dis-
tance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway con-
struction zones).
WARNING!
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off
and the instrument cluster display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous.
WARNING!
You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are
not using it.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system
is 20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the
ready state, the instrument cluster display
will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument clus-
ter display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
STARTING AND OPERATING
144
• When the automatic transmission is in
PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display
will show the set speed.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close prox-
imity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
If you do not, the vehicle may continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. If this oc-
curs:
• The message “Adaptive Cruise Control
Override” will display in the instrument
cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be de-
termined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive
position.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• Manual transmission is not in a forward
gear, if equipped.
• Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or
clutch pressed down for a fixed amount of
time, if equipped.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push
the RES button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will show the last set speed.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used
if traffic and road conditions permit. Re-
suming a set speed that is too high or too
low for prevailing traffic and road condi-
tions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe opera-
tion. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual
145
for more information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 km/h
increments until the button is released.
The increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be de-
creased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings if
equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual
for more information. The speed decrement
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 km/h
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set
speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does
not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach
the set speed, the brake system will auto-
matically slow the vehicle.
• If equipped with a manual transmission, it
is possible to make gear changes during the
normal operation of ACC that will allow the
driver to engage the appropriate gear with
respect the set speed in order to keep the
feature activated. It is canceled when the
clutch pedal is held down, or when placing
the gearbox in NEUTRAL for a certain maxi-
mum time.
STARTING AND OPERATING
146
• If equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion, ACC systems could automatically
downshift to a lower gear when driving
down hill or during accelerations. There-
fore, a slight speed change on moderate
hills is normal. This is normal and neces-
sary to maintain the set speed. When driv-
ing up hill and down hill, the ACC system
will cancel if the braking temperature ex-
ceeds normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can
be set by varying the distance setting be-
tween four bars (longest), three bars (long),
two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using
this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting will show
in the instrument cluster display.
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting — Increase button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting increases by one bar (lon-
ger). Once the longest setting is reached, if
the button is pushed again it will be set to the
shortest setting available.
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting — Decrease button and re-
lease. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Changes or modifications to any of these
systems by other than an authorized service
facility could void authorization to use this
equipment.
REAR PARKSENSE
The Rear ParkSense system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance be-
tween the rear fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up, e.g. during a parking ma-
neuver.
Rear ParkSense will retain the last system
state (enabled or disabled) from the last ig-
nition cycle when the ignition is changed to
the RUN position.
Rear ParkSense can be active only when the
gear selector is in REVERSE.
Rear ParkSense Sensors
The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in
the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area be-
hind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The sensors can detect ob-
stacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from the
147
rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
Chime
By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in
the case of the presence of a rear obstacle, an
acoustic signal that varies with the distance
of the obstacle from the bumper is activated.
The frequency of the acoustic signal:
• Increases with the distance between ve-
hicle and object decreases.
• Becomes continuous when the distance
that separates the vehicle from the obstacle
is less than approximately 12 inches
(30 cm), while terminates immediately if
the distance to the obstacle increases.
• Remains constant if the distance between
vehicle and obstacle remains unchanged. If
this situation occurs for the external sen-
sors, the signal is stopped after approxi-
mately three seconds to avoid, for example,
it activates in case of maneuver along a
wall.
When the system emits a beeping sound, the
volume of the Uconnect system, if turned on,
is automatically lowered by Rear ParkSense.
Detection Distances
If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is
taken into account only what is the shorter
distance.
Instrument Cluster Display
Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instru-
ment cluster only if you have selected "Sound
and Display" within the "Safety And Driving
Assistance" menu of the Uconnect system.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc
in the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle
and the sound tone will change from slow, to
fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or
right rear region, the display will show a
single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear
region and will produce a fast sound tone. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer
to the vehicle and the tone will change from
fast to continuous.
In general, the vehicle is closest to the ob-
stacle when the display shows only a flashing
arc and the chime becomes continuous.
The color on the display depends on the
distance and location of the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the Rear ParkSense switch
is pushed to disable the system,
the instrument cluster display will
show a message such as
“PARKSENSE DISABLED” for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
The Rear ParkSense switch LED turns ON
when the system is disabled by pressing the
switch, as well as in case of failure or tempo-
rary disabling conditions. The Rear
STARTING AND OPERATING
148
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the
Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink mo-
mentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Rear ParkSense will remember the previous
state when the vehicle is switch off.
CAUTION!
After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear
ParkSense remains in this setting until the
next ignition cycle, even in the case of
changing the setting of starting RUN to
OFF and then again in RUN.
Operation With A Trailer
The operation of the rear sensors is automati-
cally deactivated when the trailer’s electric
plug is inserted in the vehicle’s tow hook
socket. In this situation, the ParkSense
Switch LED turns on.
The rear sensors are automatically reacti-
vated when the trailer’s cable plug is re-
moved.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the un-
derside of the rear bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other ob-
struction to keep the Rear ParkSense sys-
tem operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-
brations could affect the performance of
Rear ParkSense.
• Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regu-
larly, taking care not to scratch or damage
them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear ParkSense sys-
tem might not detect an obstacle behind
the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind
the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must
not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper while driving
the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing a failure indi-
cation to be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
149
WARNING!
assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is de-
tected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and
hitch ball assembly mounted for a long pe-
riod, it is possible to filter out the trailer hitch
and hitch ball assembly presence in sensor
field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
FRONT AND REAR
PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or mov-
ing forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precau-
tions” for limitations of this system and rec-
ommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
ParkSense is active when the gear selector is
shifted to REVERSE or to a forward gear and
an obstacle is detected, as long as the system
is ON. When the gear selector shifted to
NEUTRAL (or PARK in case of automatic
gearbox), the system becomes inactive.
When the vehicle is moving forward, the
system will remain active until the vehicle
speed remains below approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h). Reducing the speed approxi-
mately below 9 mph (15 km/h), the system
will come back active. When the vehicle is
moving in REVERSE, the system will remain
active as long as the speed remains below the
maximum operating speed of 7 mph
(11 km/h). When the maximum speed limit is
exceeded, the system is disabled and the
ParkSense switch LED with illuminate. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed reduces below approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
NOTE:
For further information on Active Park Assist,
refer to the “ParkSense Active Park Assist
System” section.
STARTING AND OPERATING
150
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front
of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field
of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
39 inches (100 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “ParkSense Disabled”
message for approximately five seconds. Re-
fer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further details.
The ParkSense switch LED turns on when the
system is disabled by pushing the switch, as
well as in case of failure or temporary dis-
abling conditions. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires
service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Side Distance Warning System
The Side Distance Warning system has the
function of detecting the presence of side
obstacles near the vehicle using the parking
sensors located in the front and rear bum-
pers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only
be displayed if “Sound and Display” is se-
lected from the Customer - Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
signal and where provided, with visual indi-
cations on the instrument panel display.
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio
if on when the system is sounding an audible
tone.
Activation — Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a
short distance and if the vehicle speed is
between 0 and 11 mph (0 and 18 km/h). The
system can be activated/deactivated via the
"Settings" menu of the Uconnect system. If
the ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense Hard switch then the side dis-
tance warning system will automatically be
deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warn-
ing feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed
in the case of a failure of the Side Distance
Warning system sensors. Free the bumpers of
any obstacles, ensure that the front and rear
bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and
debris to keep the ParkSense system operat-
ing properly.
“SDW Not Available” — This message is
displayed if the Side Distance Warning sys-
tem is not available. The failed operation of
the system might be due to the insufficient
voltage from the battery or other failures on
151
the electrical system. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the elec-
trical system checked.
Operation With A Trailer
The system is automatically deactivated
when the trailer's electric plug is inserted in
the vehicle's tow hook socket. The rear sen-
sors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer's cable plug is removed.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the perfor-
mance of the Side Distance Warning System:
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to
keep the ParkSense system operating prop-
erly.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the perfor-
mance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the message
to appear in the instrument cluster display
will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle
the ignition key.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the vol-
ume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, tak-
ing care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to
do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind or in
front of the fascia/bumper.
• The presence of a tow hook without a trailer
may interfere with the correct operation of
the parking sensors. Before using the
ParkSense system, it is recommended to
remove the removable tow hook ball assem-
bly and any attachments from the vehicle
when it is not used for towing operations. If
you wish to leave the tow hook fitted with-
out towing a trailer, it is advisable to con-
tact your authorized dealer for the
ParkSense system update operations be-
cause the tow hook could be detected as an
obstacle by the central sensors.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay atten-
tion to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds
the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
STARTING AND OPERATING
152
WARNING!
could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is de-
tected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during Parallel,
Perpendicular, and Parallel Park Exit maneu-
vers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and
controlling the steering wheel. The
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is de-
fined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driv-
er's parking maneuver selection, the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is ca-
pable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel
or a perpendicular parking space on either
side (i.e., driver side or passenger side), as
well as exiting a parallel parking space.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for control-
ling the vehicle, responsible for any sur-
rounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after be-
ing instructed to remove their hands from
the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as
heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a
parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch once (LED turns on).
153
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park As-
sist switch again (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking
space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park
Assist switch.
• Driver's door is opened.
• Rear liftgate is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Brak-
ing System intervention.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
will allow a maximum number of shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the ma-
neuver cannot be completed within the
maximum amount of shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
• Gear position is in DRIVE.
• Ignition is in the RUN position.
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is ac-
tivated.
• Driver's door is closed.
• Rear liftgate is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down.
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel.
The driver must then reactivate the system
by pushing the ParkSense Active Park As-
sist switch.
• The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch will blink momen-
tarily, and then the LED will turn off if any of
the above conditions are not present.
Exiting The Parking Space
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a
perpendicular parking space, but only exiting
parallel parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active
ParkSense hard switch and then use the
steering wheel arrow buttons to select the
Parallel Park Exit feature. After the selection,
the system activates and warns the driver on
STARTING AND OPERATING
154
the instrument panel display about the opera-
tions that have to be carried out to perform
the maneuver correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the right and left arrow buttons on the
steering wheel to select between parallel or
perpendicular parking mode. Then use the
direction indicators (turn signals) to choose
the direction that you want to perform the
maneuver.
During the maneuver, the system asks to shift
to REVERSE, select the direction indicator in
the direction you want to exit. Let go of the
steering wheel and press the dedicated ped-
als, while the system handles the steering
automatically for exiting the parking space. If
the driver continues to carry out a voluntary or
involuntary action on the steering wheel dur-
ing the exit maneuver (touching or holding
the steering wheel to prevent its movement),
the maneuver will be interrupted.
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
display shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the
system gives back the vehicle control to the
driver.
Important Information
• If the sensors undergo impact which alters
their position, the system operation could
be greatly affected.
• The sensors reach top performance after
the vehicle has gone about 30 miles
(50 km) due to the dynamic tire circumfer-
ence calculations used for parking.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, tak-
ing care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not de-
tect an obstacle behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false
indication that an obstacle is behind or in
front of the fascia/bumper.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the perfor-
mance of ParkSense.
• Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle
(echo noise) due to mechanical noises, for
example while washing the vehicle or in the
case of rain, strong wind, and hail.
• The sensors may not detect objects of a
particular shape or made from particular
materials (very thin poles, trailer beams,
panels, nets, bushes, anti-parking posts,
pavements, rubbish bins, motor vehicles,
etc.). Always take great care to check that
the vehicle and its path are actually com-
patible with the parking place identified by
the system.
• The use of wheels and tires that are differ-
ent size to the original equipment could
affect the operation of the system.
• The operation of the rear sensors is auto-
matically deactivated when the trailer's
electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow
hook socket, while the front sensors stay
active and can provide acoustic and visual
warnings. The rear sensors are automati-
cally reactivated when the trailer's cable
plug is removed.
155
• In "Search in progress" mode, the system
could incorrectly identify a parking place to
carry out the maneuver (e.g. by a junction,
driveways, roads crossing the direction of
travel, etc.).
• In the case of parking maneuvers on roads
on a slope, the performance of the system
could be inferior and it may deactivate.
• If a parking maneuver is being carried out
between two parked vehicles alongside the
pavement, the system may cause the ve-
hicle to mount the pavement.
• Some maneuvers at very tight bends might
be impossible to be carried out.
• Take great care to ensure that conditions do
not change during the parking maneuver
(e.g. if there are persons and/or animals in
the parking place, moving vehicles, etc.)
and intervene immediately if necessary.
• During parking maneuvers, pay attention to
vehicles approaching from the opposite di-
rection. Always abide by the law and road
regulations.
NOTE:
• Correct system operation is not guaranteed
if snow chains or the space-saver wheel are
fitted.
• The function only informs the driver about
the last appropriate parking place (parallel
or perpendicular) detected by the parking
sensors.
• Some messages displayed are accompa-
nied by acoustic warnings.
LANESENSE
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at
speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system
uses a forward looking camera to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts out of the
lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. If the driver continues to unin-
tentionally drift out of the lane, the Lane-
Sense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across
the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected,
a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-
vided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met,
the LaneSense system will monitor if the
STARTING AND OPERATING
156
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and
provides an audible warning to the driver
when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if
the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off.
The LaneSense button is located on the cen-
ter stack.
To turn the LaneSense
system on, push the
LaneSense button
(LED turns off). A
“Lane Sense On” mes-
sage is shown in the
instrument cluster dis-
play.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the cur-
rent lane drift condition through the instru-
ment cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane bound-
aries have not been detected and the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the
LaneSense telltale is solid white when only
the left lane marking has been detected
and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense
telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been de-
tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane de-
parture occurs.
157
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and
the left thin line turn solid white. The
LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the oppo-
site direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense
telltale changes from solid yellow to flash-
ing yellow. At this time, torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane bound-
aries have not been detected and the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the
LaneSense telltale is solid white when only
the left lane marking has been detected
and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense
telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been de-
tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane de-
parture occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and
left thin line turn solid yellow. The Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied
to the steering wheel in the opposite direc-
tion of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line
remains solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
STARTING AND OPERATING
158
tale changes from solid yellow to flashing
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you
can configure through the Uconnect system
screen.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn-
ings.
• The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (anti-lock brakes, traction control
system, electronic stability control, forward
collision warning, etc.).
REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen image of your vehicle's rear
surroundings when the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen display along with a note
to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. The camera is located above
the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear cam-
era mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Parking Camera
159
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE,
a touchscreen "X" button is overlapped to the
camera image in order to disable the visual-
ization earlier than 10 seconds.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based
on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance
to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red
0-1ft
(0-30cm)
Yellow
1ft-3ft
(30cm-1m)
Green
3 ft or greater
(1 m or greater)
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Rear Back Up Cam-
era. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestri-
ans, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surround-
ings and must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up
Camera should only be used as a parking
aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle
must be driven slowly when using the
Rear Back Up Camera to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look fre-
CAUTION!
quently over his/her shoulder when us-
ing the Rear Back Up Camera.
ADDING FUEL
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper
placed at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it
opens and closes automatically upon
insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.
The Capless Fuel System is designed so that
it prevents the filling of an incorrect type of
fuel.
Opening The Door
For filling proceed as follows:
• Open the door, by pushing and releasing on
the indentation point indicated by the ar-
row.
STARTING AND OPERATING
160
• Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and
proceed with filling the fuel tank.
• Before removing the nozzle, wait at least
10 seconds to allow the fuel to flow inside
of the tank.
• Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then
close the door.
Emergency Refueling Procedure
If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:
• Open the liftgate and remove the emer-
gency fuel fill funnel located in the cargo
area.
• Open the fuel door.
• Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the
filler pipe and proceed to fill the fuel tank.
• Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and
close the door.
• Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the
cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of
the filler neck other than is provided on
the car.
• The use of objects/plugs do not comply
with the vehicle and may cause pressure
increases inside the tank, creating dan-
gerous conditions.
• Do not approach the neck of the tank
with open flames or lit cigarettes its an
extreme fire hazard. Also, avoid close
contact with the filler pipe with your
face, do not inhale harmful vapors.
• Do not use your mobile phone in the
vicinity of the pump fuel nozzle, it can
be a possible risk of fire.
Fuel Filler Door
Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
161
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum
trailer weight ratings towable for your given
drivetrain.
Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
1.3L Turbo 2000 lbs (906 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
2.4L 2000 lbs (906 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight refer-
enced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
STARTING AND OPERATING
162
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Con-
tact state and provincial Highway Safety
offices for additional details.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this ve-
hicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-
tomer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
Recreational Towing
Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the
front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels
off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four
wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place
the transmission in PARK. Turn the engine
OFF.
• Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
• Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do
not start the engine.
• Press and hold the brake pedal.
• Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
• Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake
pedal.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle
requires towing, make sure the drive
wheels are OFF the ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on
the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on a
flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four
wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
163
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the switch bank below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning Flasher. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition
is placed in OFF mode.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
164
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps (LED Version) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)/Front Turn Indicator PY24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps (If Equipped With LED Headlamps) PY24W
Front Fog Lamps H11
Front Fog Lamps (LED Versions) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators (LED Versions) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Reverse W16W
License Plate Lamp W5W
165
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
WARNING!
services are switched off and/or disen-
gaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking sys-
tem), power unit systems (engine sys-
tem, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel
is located on the left side of the engine
compartment.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further fuse
information
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer,
Rear Distribution Unit
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply
Body Computer
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics
Module
Engine Compartment Fuse Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
166
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted
Steering
F06 20 Amp Yellow –
2.4L Engine
70 Amp Tan – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
– – Engine Cooling Fan
F07 50 Amp Red – 2.4L Engine – – Engine Cooling Fan
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission,
GSM
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine
F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – – 5 Amp Tan – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
25 Amp Clear –
2.4L Engine
Supply Secondary Loads
F14 – – 15 Amp Blue – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
WCAC Pump/Active Grille
Shutters
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module
Pump
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control
Module Power, Automatic
Transmission
F17 – – 30 Amp Green –
1.3L Turbo Engine
15 Amp Blue –
2.4L Engine
Supply Primary Loads
167
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-
Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – – 10 Amp Red – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
20 Amp Yellow –
2.4L Engine
Power Control Module
Engine
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield – If
Equipped
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Au-
tomatic Transmission
F82 – – 20 Amp Yellow – 1.3L
Turbo Engine
Power Control Module
Engine
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel
Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic
Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State
Of Charge)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
168
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the
steering column at the bottom of the instru-
ment panel.
For the fuse replacement see an authorized
dealer.
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan
Air Conditioning
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side)
F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning,
USB Port, Rear Ceiling Lights (With Sunroof),
E-Call, SGW
F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus,
All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Brake Pedal
Switch (NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Power Under Lock and Key, Brake Control
Electronics Module, Electric Power-Assisted
Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
169
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Supply ParkSense, SGW, Mirror, Heated Front
Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC System, S&S
Inhibition Command, Blind Spot, Rain/Light
Sensor, Humidity Sensor
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning, Lane Departure Warning,
Terrain Selector, Backup Lights Switch (MT),
Trailer Tow Module, Compass Module, Rear
View Camera
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless
Enter-N-Go
F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
170
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door
from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse
holder No. 1 and fuse holder No. 2 (if
equipped with trailer towing) are located
closest to the rear of the vehicle.
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter
F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System
F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat (Driver Side)
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats
On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse
for the sun visor of the retractable roof.
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer
F5 15 Amp Blue
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side)
F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger
Side)
171
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving traf-
fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dan-
gerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be
crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool
for changing tires only. The jack should
not be used to lift the vehicle for service
purposes. The vehicle should be jacked
on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and tools are located in the rear
storage compartment if equipped, inside a
special container.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Jack And Tools Location
Jack And Tools
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Chocks
5 — Screwdriver
6 — Emergency Allen Key
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
172
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare
tire.
4. Remove the chocks.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
6. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-
paired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as pos-
sible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
WARNING!
far enough off the road to avoid being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (auto-
matic transmission) or REVERSE (manual
transmission).
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking posi-
tion. For example, if changing the right
front tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warn-
ings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
173
WARNING!
• Always park on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake and place an
automatic transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when
it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is
on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indi-
cated and for lifting this vehicle during a
tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or in-
flated, are securely stowed, spares must
WARNING!
be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those indi-
cated in the Jacking Instructions for this
vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel
bolt wrench.
Jacking Locations
Jack Warning Label
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
174
2. If equipped with wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel
bolt wrench to pry the center cap off
carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the jacking
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jacking location is indicated by a
stamped arrow on the body. Turn the jack
screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cut-
out in the sill cladding.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove
the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location
175
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a
compact spare tire or a limited — use
spare tire. Refer to “Tires — General
Information” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” in your Owner’s Manual for fur-
ther information.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not at-
tempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel
bolts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened
twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications”
in “Technical Specifications” for the
proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks,
and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-
paired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
Mounting Spare Tire
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
176
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel
bolts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage. Tighten
the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Re-
fer to “Torque Specifications” in the
“Technical Specifications” section for the
proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or service station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
wheel chocks. Stow the jack and tools
back in the proper storage location. Re-
lease the Electric Park Brake before driv-
ing the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel
bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure
that all wheel bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF
EQUIPPED
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear
storage compartment inside a storage con-
tainer. Located inside the container are a
screwdriver and the emergency fuel funnel.
To access the Tire Service Kit open the lift-
gate and remove the load floor.
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Plug (Located On Bottom
Side Of Tire Service Kit)
2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Power Button
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Warning Label
177
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first
emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit
located in the rear storage compartment in-
side the storage container.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can
be repaired; the kit can be used in all weather
conditions. Do not remove the foreign object
from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the
vehicle, take it out from the bag and place
it near the punctured tire. Screw the clear
flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle
power outlet socket. Start the vehicle
engine.
3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to
the “I” position. The electric compressor
will be turned on, sealant and air will
inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure
should be reached within 20 minutes. If
the pressure has not been reached turn
off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive
the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and
forth, to better distribute the sealant in-
side the tire.
4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the
compressor directly to the tire valve and
repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been
reached, start driving the vehicle to uni-
formly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check
the tire pressure. If the pressure is below
19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle,
as the tire is too damaged, and contact
the nearest authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and re-
paired or replaced after using Tire Service
Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you. Have the
WARNING!
tire checked as soon as possible at an
authorized dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or
above repeat the inflation process to
reach the correct tire pressure and con-
tinue driving.
5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle
and place it on the dashboard as a re-
minder to the driver that the tire has been
treated with Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may
get hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side
of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
178
WARNING!
of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circum-
stances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from
driving with extremely low tire pres-
sure.
– If the tire has any damage from
driving on a flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of
the tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward
in a collision or hard stop could endan-
ger the occupants of the vehicle. Always
stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are seri-
WARNING!
ous or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of
Tire Service Kit to come in contact with
hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit
sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation.
Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if
there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution con-
tains latex. In case of an allergic reac-
tion or rash, consult a physician imme-
diately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse
mouth immediately with plenty of water
and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Replacing The Sealant
NOTE:
Replace the sealant canister prior to the ex-
piration date at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special
compartment, away from sources of heat.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
179
WARNING!
Failure to follow this WARNING may result
in sealant canister rupture and serious
injury or death.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the
front of the engine compartment, behind the
left headlight assembly.
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the positive battery post.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.
Positive Battery Post
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
180
WARNING!
You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK
(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
place the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec-
essary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other
as this could establish a ground connec-
tion and personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting proce-
dure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged ve-
hicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
181
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega-
tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi-
tive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start
your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehi-
cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis-
charge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The fuel filling procedure in case of emer-
gency is described in the “Emergency Refu-
eling Procedure”. Refer to “Adding Fuel” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your en-
gine by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, put trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con-
ditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continu-
ous chimes, turn the engine off immedi-
ately and call for service.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
182
• You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows
the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from
the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position,
you can use the following procedure to tem-
porarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Carefully separate the gear selector boot
assembly from the bezel.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool
down into the gear selector override ac-
cess hole (at the right front corner of the
gear selector assembly), and push and
hold the override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot on the
bezel.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or
SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with manual
transmission), while gently pressing the ac-
celerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking mo-
tion without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
Gear Selector Bezel Location
183
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec-
onds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con-
trol” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again
to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
WARNING!
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode
and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the
wheels may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five
CAUTION!
rocking-motion cycles. This will mini-
mize overheating and reduce the risk of
clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift-
ing between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the
wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also dam-
age the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
184
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing
a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
FWD MODELS FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required
to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only
tow bars and other equipment designed for
this purpose, following equipment manufac-
turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-
ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total
electrical failure when the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel
dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the
ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this ve-
hicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-
tomer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-
frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the RUN mode. If the key fob is
unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is dis-
charged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in
this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle
can be moved.
185
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to
your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
on a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must towed with the front wheels OFF
the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is re-
leased, and remains released, while being
towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from im-
proper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
The manufacturer requires towing with all
four wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable
methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its
wheels on the ground. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the
ground). Internal damage to the trans-
mission or power transfer unit will occur
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or power transfer unit
damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,
there will be one in the rear and two mounted
on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will
be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to
use both of the front tow hooks to minimize
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without opening the door. During towing re-
member that not having the aid of the power
brakes and the electromechanical power
steering, greater force is needed in applying
the brakes and steering of the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
186
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing seri-
ous injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling
with tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed
under certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit-
ting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
187
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in
the instrument cluster. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating
conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” mes-
sage is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your ve-
hicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
one year or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles
(6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time
if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predomi-
nately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.
This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-
voir, and brake master cylinder reservoir,
and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten termi-
nals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection
and hoses.
Rotate the tires, Rotate at the first sign of ir-
regular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the
following page for the required maintenance
intervals.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
188
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check tire condition/wear and adjust
pressure, if necessary, check Tire Service
Kit expiration date (if equipped).
•••••••••••••••
Check operation of lighting system
(headlamps, direction indicators, hazard
warning lights, luggage compartment,
passenger compartment, glove compart-
ment, instrument panel warning lights,
etc.).
•••••••••••••••
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid
levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, wind-
shield washer, battery, engine coolant,
etc.).1
•••••••••••••••
Check engine control system operation
(via diagnostic tool).2
•••••••••••••••
Visually inspect condition of: exterior
bodywork, underbody protection, pipes
and hoses (exhaust - fuel system -
brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves,
bushings, etc.).
•• ••• • • •
Check windshield/rear window wiper
blade position/wear.
•• ••• • • •
189
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check operation of windshield washer
system and adjust jets if necessary.
•• ••• • • •
Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate
locks and cleanliness and lubrication of
linkages.
•••• • • •
Visually check the condition and wear of
the front and rear brakes.
•••••••••••••••
Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV
joints and replace if necessary.
•••• • • •
Visual inspect the condition of the ac-
cessory drive belt.3
•• •
Check the tension of the accessory drive
belt.
••
Inspect and replace, if required, front
end accessory drive belt, tensioner, and,
idler pulley.3
••
Inspect and replace PCV valve if neces-
sary.
•
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.*
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
190
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • •
Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • •
Replace spark plugs (1.3L Turbo En-
gine)**
•• •
Replace spark plugs (2.4L Engine)** •
Replace engine air filter. # • • • • • • •
Replace brake fluid every two years. *** • • • • • • •
Replace cabin filter. ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-
road, desert operation or more than 50% of
your driving is at sustained speeds during
hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
• •
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
••
191
○ Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
# The engine air cleaner should be in-
spected at every oil change if used in dusty
areas.
* The oil and oil filter replacement must be
carried out when indicated by a warning
light or message on the instrument panel,
or in any case should not exceed 1 year or
10,000 miles (16,000 km).
** The spark plug change is distance based
only, yearly intervals do not apply. The fol-
lowing are essential to ensure correct opera-
tion and prevent serious damage to the en-
gine:
• Only use spark plugs of the same make and
type which are specially certified for such
engines (refer to “Fluids and Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further in-
formation).
• Strictly comply with the spark plug replace-
ment interval given in the “Maintenance
Schedule” for spark plug replacement.
• Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any questions.
*** The brake fluid change interval is time
based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
1 Always only use the liquids shown in the
handbook for topping up after having
checked that the system is not damage.
2 If the engine oil quality detected by the
vehicle diagnostics is lower than 20%, it is
advisable to replace the engine oil and en-
gine filter in order to avoid another service
operation after a short time.
3 The maximum mileage is 75000 miles
(120,000 km). The belt must be replaced
every 6 years, regardless of distance trav-
elled. If the vehicle is used in heavy condi-
tions (dusty areas, cold climates, urban
driving, long periods of idling), the maxi-
mum mileage is 37,500 miles
(60,000 km). The belt must be replaced
every 4 years regardless of the mileage.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a com-
petent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
192
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L Turbo Engine
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Battery 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
193
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
194
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the en-
gine oil must be maintained at the correct
level. Check the oil level at regular intervals,
such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five min-
utes after a fully warmed up engine is shut
off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high
end of the range.
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase
will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure.
This could damage your engine.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts auto-
WARNING!
matically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or
turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The
fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appear-
ance, the system should be drained, flushed
and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If
dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
195
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is lo-
cated in the engine compartment, and the
fluid level should be checked at regular inter-
vals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Re-
fer to “Engine Compartment” in this section
for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be in-
spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-
nance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal
can result in abnormally high brake tem-
peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. Riding the brakes
may also reduce braking capacity in an
emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should
be checked when performing under hood
services, or immediately if the “Brake Warn-
ing Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin-
der area before removing the cap. If neces-
sary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid
level should be checked when the pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be
needed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir sup-
plies fluid to both the brake system and the
clutch release system. The two systems are
separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The
manual transmission clutch release system
should not require fluid replacement during
the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid
reservoir is low and the brake system does not
indicate any leaks or other problems, it may
be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch
release system. See an authorized dealer for
service.
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in the “Technical Specifications” section for
further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in the “Technical Specifications”
section for further information. Using
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
196
WARNING!
the wrong type of brake fluid can se-
verely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type
of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory in-
stalled hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake
fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs
moisture from the air resulting in a lower
boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot en-
gine parts, causing the brake fluid to
catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these
surfaces.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect
overall clutch system performance. Im-
proper brake fluids may damage the clutch
system resulting in loss of clutch function
and the ability to shift the transmission.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill
plug. The fluid level should be between the
bottom of the fill hole and a point not more
than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and
does not require adjustment under normal
operating conditions. Routine fluid level
checks are not required; therefore the trans-
mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using
special service tools. If you notice fluid leak-
age or transmission malfunction, visit an au-
thorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
197
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-
free battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce-
dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
WARNING!
• Battery posts, terminals, and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the nega-
tive post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi-
fied on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the bat-
tery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
vehicle battery cables before connecting
the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified ser-
vice personnel, special tools, and equipment
to perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be-
fore attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a ser-
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
198
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road
film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost
or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum prod-
ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-
pending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades
to be placed in a position that allows the
wiper blades to be easily changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the
wipers must be in the Park position before
placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF posi-
tion.
Service mode must be activated within two
minutes after the ignition is placed in the
STOP/OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the
Service Position command (antipanic) must
be active for at least half a second.
At every valid activation of Service Position
command, the wiper blades are activated for
250 ms.
The Service Position command can be re-
peated several times to bring the blades into
the desired position, up to a maximum of
three times.
After three subsequent activations the strat-
egy is disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
• The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN
position.
• Number of subsequent activations is three.
• Two minutes timer has expired after turning
the ignition OFF.
NOTE:
When turning the ignition ON, the blades will
go into the parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise
the wiper blade off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the
wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
199
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to
raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate
glass.
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the
wiper blade end while pushing the wiper
blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap
the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder on the wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the
wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper
arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until
it snaps into place.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Stan-
dards Code
(TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size Desig-
nation
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service
Description
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
200
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires
have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size
molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter "P" is absent
from this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same
as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-
ceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Ex-
ample: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
201
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
202
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however, the date code may only be
on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will
have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If
the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the
tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for
highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
203
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pres-
sure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
204
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must
not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the
tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
205
To determine the maximum loading condi-
tions of your vehicle, locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli-
cable) should never exceed the weight refer-
enced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows ex-
amples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
206
207
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stop-
ping distance. Use tires of the recom-
mended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by
improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that re-
sult in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail sud-
denly, resulting in loss of vehicle con-
trol.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steer-
ing problems. You could lose control of
your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over respon-
siveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable steer-
ing response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
208
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge
of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could dam-
age the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard
are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to
a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F
(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for
this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits.
Where speed limits or conditions are such
that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
209
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repair-
able).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re-
pairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat
tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the
tire pressure sensor as well as it is not de-
signed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid
loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the
run flat mode it has limited driving capabili-
ties and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat
tire is changed after driving with underin-
flated tire condition, please replace the TPM
sensor as it is not designed to be reused when
driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa))
condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving
the vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while
a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con-
ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 sec-
onds continuously when you are stuck,
and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
210
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section
for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These ab-
normal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating
of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these
tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte-
nance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,
and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal-
ance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi-
cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
211
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in
the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with
any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability. Failure to use equiva-
lent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified
for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may
change suspension dimensions and per-
formance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling, and brak-
WARNING!
ing of your vehicle. This can cause un-
predictable handling and stress to steer-
ing and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was origi-
nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
tire with a smaller load index could re-
sult in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedom-
eter and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all sea-
sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all
season tires. All season tires can be identi-
fied by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designa-
tion on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet
and dry conditions, and are not intended to
be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less
than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
212
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con-
ditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained
speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds
above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equip-
ment or an authorized tire dealer for recom-
mended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-
studded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an auto-
CAUTION!
matic car wash with a compact or limited
use temporary spare installed. Damage to
the vehicle may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s
Manual for restrictions when towing with a
spare tire designated for temporary emer-
gency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare
tire and wheel equivalent in look and function
to the original equipment tire and wheel
found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation
for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this op-
tion, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your ve-
hicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
213
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de-
scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary
WARNING!
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limita-
tions for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in
loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
214
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-
num and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)
soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle and remember to always
wash when the surfaces are not hot to the
touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other
road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can
damage the wheel’s protective coating that
helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar-
CAUTION!
ket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ-
ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning
chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or
Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-
acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
CAUTION!
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle
and apply the brakes to remove the water
droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake
rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when
braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com-
pounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
215
CAUTION!
on a regular basis; this is all that is re-
quired to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-
to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• Due to limited clearance, the following
traction devices are recommended:
All Models:
• The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted
with the use of 215/65R16 tires only.
Chain front tires ONLY. All other size tires
are NOT chainable.
• No other tire sizes can be chained.
CAUTION!
• Use on front tires ONLY.
• Damage may result if tire chains or trac-
tion devices are used with original
equipment size tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You
could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other sus-
pension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indi-
cate device breakage. Remove the dam-
CAUTION!
aged parts of the device before further
use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufactur-
er’s instructions on the method of instal-
lation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested oper-
ating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a com-
pact spare tire.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
216
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform differ-
ent steering, handling, and braking func-
tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rota-
tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread
designs such as those on On/Off Road type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,
and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this sec-
tion for the proper maintenance intervals.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rota-
tion method is the “forward cross” shown in
the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that
must not be reversed.
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire
rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive ve-
hicles depends on tires of equal size, type
and circumference on each wheel. Any
difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance
tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
217
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of as-
phalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not in-
clude acceleration, cornering, hy-
droplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
218
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, under-inflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for
more than a month, observe the following
precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and
possibly airy location the windows open
slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not
engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from
the battery post and be sure that the battery
is fully charged. During storage check bat-
tery charge quarterly.
• If you do not disconnect the battery from
the electrical system, check the battery
charge every thirty days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by
applying protective waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by
applying protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear
wiper blades and leave raised from the
glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover
taking care not to damage the painted sur-
face by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do
not use plastic sheeting which will not allow
the evaporation of moisture present on the
surface of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi
(+50 kPa) higher than recommended on
the tire placard and check it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is station-
ary for two weeks or more, idle the engine
for approximately five minutes with the air
conditioning system on and high fan speed.
This will ensure a proper lubrication of the
system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle
is put back into operation.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or
driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park
Start Procedure is required to start the ve-
hicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and nega-
tive terminals to the battery, wait at least a
minute with ignition switch in the OFF
position and close the drivers door. When
reconnecting the positive and negative ter-
minals to the battery be sure the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the
drivers door is closed.
219
BODYWORK
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse
the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to re-
move.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
CAUTION!
powder that will scratch metal and
painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding
1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in
damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the re-
sponsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle re-
paired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemi-
cals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure
that such materials are well packaged and
sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flam-
mable, and if used in closed areas they
may cause respiratory harm.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
220
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or
worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be re-
placed after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco-
rated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-
ately.
• Damage caused by these type of prod-
ucts may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily
with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care
should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de-
tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to main-
tain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends
to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric
dye transfer more so than darker colors. The
leather is designed for easy cleaning, and
FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
221
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based
and/or Ketone based cleaning products to
clean leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass
cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or
windows equipped with radio antennas. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are
using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the
mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
222
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Chassis Number
The chassis number (VIN) is stamped on a
plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel cover, which is visible from
outside the car through the windshield.
This number is also stamped on the floor of
the passenger compartment, near the right
front seat.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-
moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug
nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality
six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Wheel Bolt Torque **Wheel
Bolt Size
Wheel
Bolt
Socket
Size
89 Ft-Lbs
(120 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only an authorized dealer recom-
mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove
any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion
or loose particles.
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug
nut/bolt.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
223
After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts
are properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel
bolts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.3L Turbo Engine
T
his engine is designed to
meet all emissions
requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy
and performance, when
using high-quality unleaded
“regular” gasoline having an
octane rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2
method.
The use of a 91 or higher octane “premium”
gasoline will allow these engines to operate to
optimal performance. This increase in performance
is most noticeable in hot weather or other heavier
load conditions, such as while towing.
While
operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking
sound from the engine is not a cause for
concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower
than recommended octane number can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-
tions. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
2.4L Engine
All available gasoline
engines are designed
to meet all emissions
regulations and pro-
vide excellent fuel
economy and perfor-
mance when using
high quality unleaded
“regular” gasoline having a octane rating of
87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gaso-
line in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-
Torque Pattern
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
224
ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-
tions. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level
of detergents to further
aide in minimizing en-
gine and fuel system
deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top
Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish re-
moval may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas-
ket and diaphragm materials.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.3L Turbo / 2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Turbo Engine (SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS Synthetic, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.3 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
1.3L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
8.8 Quarts 8.3 Liters
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula)
6.8 Quarts 6.5 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
225
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 1.3L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS API Certified Synthetic
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-
13340 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.3L Turbo Engine
87 Octane (R+M)/2, 0–15% Ethanol
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
226
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regardless of mileage.
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
• The following highlights just some of the
many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality spe-
cifically for your Jeep Renegade.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain
far more than expressive style, premium
protection, or extreme entertainment, you
also benefit from enhancing your vehicle
with accessories that have been thoroughly
tested and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso-
ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and
mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
227
EXTERIOR:
• Spare Tire Kit • Front End Cover • Body Graphics
• Air Deflectors • Splash Guards • Trailer Hitch
• Wheel Locks
INTERIOR:
• Premium Floor Mats • Door Sill Guards • Molded Cargo Tray
• Katzkin Leather Interiors • Bright Pedal Kit • Camping Tent
• Slush Mats
ELECTRONICS:
• Mopar Web (WiFi) • Park Distance Sensors • Rear View Camera
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System • Heated Windshield Washer Solvent
CARRIERS:
• Roof Top Cargo Basket • Sport Utility Bars • Roof-mount Bike Carrier
• Roof-mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Hitch-mount Bike Carriers • Roof Cargo Box Carrier
MOPAR PERFORMANCE:
• Cat-back Exhaust
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
228
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wire-
less networks. These networks allow your ve-
hicle to send and receive information. This
information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys-
tems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup-
pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps
as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the po-
tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac-
cess to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if
the most recent version of vehicle software
(such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all
of the possible outcomes if your vehi-
cle’s systems are breached. It may be
possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,
or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious soft-
ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to
your nearest authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
– Routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Cana-
dian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-
cations cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to ”Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual.
229
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A Glance
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Buttons
1 — RADIO Button
2 — COMPASS Button
3 — SETTINGS Button
4 — MORE Functions Button
5 — BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob
6 — SCREEN OFF Button
7 — MUTE Button
8 — System On/Off — VOLUME Control Knob
9 — Uconnect PHONE Button
10 — MEDIA Button
MULTIMEDIA
230
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in damage to the touch-
screen.
Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure:
1. Press the “Settings” button on the face-
plate, then press the “Clock and Date”
button.
2. Press the “Set Time” button on the
touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust
the hours or minutes, then select the
“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen.
You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by
pressing the desired button on the
touchscreen.
4. Once the time is set, press the “Done”
button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select
“Display Clock”. Display Clock turns the
clock display in the status bar on or off.
Audio Setting
1. Press the “Settings” button on the
faceplate.
2. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button
on the touchscreen to open the Audio
menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following op-
tions for you to customize your audio
settings.
Equalizer
Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen
to adjust the equalizer to your desired set-
tings.
Balance/Fade
Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound level from
the front and rear or right and left side speak-
ers. Press the center “C” button on the touch-
screen to reset the balance and fade to the
factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume — If Equipped
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1,
2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume
relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.
Loudness — If Equipped
Press the “Loudness” button on the touch-
screen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound
quality at lower volumes.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the “Surround Sound” button on the
touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed
by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen. When this feature is activated,
it provides simulated surround sound mode.
231
Radio Operation
Store Radio Presets Manually
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of
the Radio modes. There are four visible pre-
sets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing
the “All” button on the touchscreen on the
radio home screen displays all of the preset
stations for that mode.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds, or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Seek Next/Previous Buttons
• Press the Seek Next or Seek Previous but-
ton to seek through radio stations in AM,
FM or SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations with-
out stopping.
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone)
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a
compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and
read it to you over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice
Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of
the 18 pre-defined messages.
Here’s How:
1. Push the Voice Recognition (VR)
or
the Phone button and wait for the beep,
then say “reply.” Uconnect gives the fol-
lowing prompt: “Please say the message
you would like to send.”
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the
pre-defined messages. (If you are not
sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect will
then read the pre-defined messages
allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you
would like to send, you can interrupt the
list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect
Radio Operation
1 — Radio Station Preset
2 — All Presets
3 — Seek Next
4 — Audio Settings
5 — Station Information
6 — Direct Tune
7 — Radio Band
8 — Seek Previous
MULTIMEDIA
232
phone button and saying the phrase.
Uconnect will confirm the message by
reading it back to you.
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traf-
fic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be <5,
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60>* min-
utes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in
<5, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>*
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
*Use only the numbering listed or the system
may not transcribe the message properly.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses natural language to
understand what you mean and responds
back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help
you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release
the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages and
many other useful requests.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH
DISPLAY
Uconnect 4 At A Glance
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
Screen
233
Setting The Time
1. For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and
then press the time display at the top of
the screen. Press “Yes.”
2. If the time is not displayed at the top of
the screen, press the “Settings” button on
the touchscreen. In the Settings screen,
press the “Clock & Date” button on the
touchscreen, then check or uncheck this
option.
3. Press “+” or “–” next to “Set Time Hours”
and “Set Time Minutes” to adjust the
time.
4. If these features are not available, un-
check the Sync Time box.
5. Press “X” to save your settings and exit
out of the Clock Setting screen.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed
Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loud-
ness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and
Radio Off With Door.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-
justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the auto-
matic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Loudness — If Equipped
• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen
to activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deac-
tivate this feature. When Loudness is On,
the sound quality at lower volumes
improves.
AUX Volume Offset
• Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on
the touchscreen to activate the AUX Vol-
ume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset
is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–”
buttons. This alters the AUX input audio
volume. The level value, which spans be-
tween plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The
Auto Play feature has two settings “On”
and “Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins
playing from a connected device, immedi-
ately after it is connected to the radio.
MULTIMEDIA
234
Auto On Radio — If Equipped
• The Radio automatically turns on when
vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was
on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
• Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on
the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off
With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door
feature, when activated, keeps the radio on
until the driver or passenger door is opened,
or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down
onto the main menu bar, will now be an active
App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is
in PARK.
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
235
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — Main Category Bar
5 — Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse And Manage Presets
10 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
236
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-
dio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-
tering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touch-
screen radio display. Android Auto automati-
cally brings you useful information, and orga-
nizes it into simple cards that appear just
when they are needed. Android Auto can be
used with Google's best-in-class speech tech-
nology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the
radio display’s touchscreen to control many
of your apps. To use Android Auto follow the
following steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-
powered smartphone.
237
2. Connect your Android-powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If you have not downloaded
the Android Auto app to your smartphone
before plugging in the device for the first
time, the app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as af-
termarket cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the
use of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, Android Auto should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by
touching the Android Auto icon on the
touchscreen, located under Apps.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data
plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,
etc. for music
• Hands-free Calling, and Texting for com-
munication
• Hundreds of compatible apps, and many
more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular cov-
erage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen. Once Android Auto has made a
connection through USB, Android Auto will
also connect via Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto
and Google Play are trademarks of Google
Inc.
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Android Auto
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
MULTIMEDIA
238
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-
Play, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using
iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-
tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the
very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, CarPlay should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by
touching the CarPlay icon on the touch-
screen, located under Apps.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-
erage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Apple CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
239
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV
WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
WARNING!
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati-
cally via GPS, so it should not require any
time adjustment. If you do need to set the
time manually, follow the instructions be-
low for Model 4C NAV.
• For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then
press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock” button on the touchscreen,
then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable
from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d
like to set a theme, follow the instructions
below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen and select the display menu.
• Then press the “Set Theme” button on the
touchscreen and select a theme.
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA
240
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and
Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-
justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the auto-
matic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now
be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is
in PARK.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Main Menu
241
Radio
Uconnect 4C NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
242
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-
dio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-
tering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV) operates similar to a conventional
radio except it allows broadcasters to trans-
mit a high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is
provided with a clear sound that enhances
the listening experience. HD radio can also
transmit data such as song title or artist.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touch-
screen radio display. Android Auto automati-
cally brings you useful information, and orga-
nizes it into simple cards that appear just
when they are needed. Android Auto can be
used with Google's best-in-class speech tech-
243
nology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the
radio display’s touchscreen to control many
of your apps. To use Android Auto follow
these steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-
powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If you have not downloaded
the Android Auto app to your smartphone
before plugging in the device for the first
time, the app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as af-
termarket cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the
use of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once Android Auto has made a connec-
tion through USB, Android Auto will also
connect via Bluetooth. The system dis-
plays the Android Auto home screen.
Android Auto automatically launches, but
if it does not, refer to the Uconnect Own-
er’s Manual Supplement for the proce-
dure to enable the feature “AutoShow.”
You can also launch it by pressing Android
Auto located in the “Apps” menu. If you
use Android Auto frequently you can move
the app to the menu bar at the bottom of
the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button
and locate the Android Auto app; then
drag the selected App to replace an exist-
ing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data
plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,
etc. for music
• Hands-free Calling, and Texting for com-
munication
• Hundreds of compatible apps, and many
more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular cov-
erage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen.
Android Auto
MULTIMEDIA
244
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto
and Google Play are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon
in Android Auto to access Google Maps.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts
you and any spoken navigation command
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro-
vides voice-guided:
• Navigation
• Live traffic information
• Lane guidance
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect naviga-
tion system, and you try and start a new route
using Android Auto, via voice or any other
method, a pop-up appears asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect naviga-
tion to smartphone navigation. A pop-up also
appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if
Android Auto is currently in use and you
attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route.
Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type
to the newly used method of navigation and a
route is planned for the new destination. If
“No” is selected the navigation type remains
unchanged.
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or
https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canadian Residents).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to
https://support.google.com/android or
https://support.google.com/androidauto/.
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
Google Maps
245
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream end-
less music on the road.
NOTE:
For music apps, playlists, and stations to
work with Android Auto, they must be set up
on your smartphone before using
Android Auto.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to
https://support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to acti-
vate voice recognition specific to the Android
Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to
text messages, have incoming text messages
read out loud, and place and receive hands-
free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use
with Android Auto, every time it is launched.
You must have the compatible app down-
loaded, and you must be signed in to the app
for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to
g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of avail-
able apps for Android Auto.
Android Auto Music
Android Auto Contact
Android Auto Phone
MULTIMEDIA
246
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-
Play, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using
iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-
tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the
very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected, the system
displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple
CarPlay automatically launches, but if
not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for the procedure to enable
the feature “AutoShow.” You can also
launch it by pressing the CarPlay icon
located in the “Apps” menu. If you use
Apple CarPlay frequently you can move
the app to the menu bar at the bottom of
the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button
and locate the CarPlay app; then drag and
drop the selected App to replace an exist-
ing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-
erage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
CarPlay
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
247
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Phone
With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. You can also press and
hold the Home button within CarPlay to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls
or listen to voice mail as you normally would
using Siri on your iPhone.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on
the steering wheel launches a built-in VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not
function with CarPlay.
Music
CarPlay allows you to access all your artists,
playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your
iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select
third party audio apps including music,
news, sports, podcasts and more.
Messages
Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to
use Siri to send or reply to text messages.
Since everything is done by voice, Siri can
also read incoming text messages so you
don’t have to.
Maps
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel
to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a cat-
egory, by launching Siri from the destinations
page, or even by typing in a destination.
NOTE:
• If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts
you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Apple Music
Maps
MULTIMEDIA
248
• If you are using the built-in Uconnect navi-
gation system, and you try and start a new
route using CarPlay, via voice or any other
method, a pop-up appears asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect naviga-
tion to iPhone navigation. A pop-up also
appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if
CarPlay navigation is currently in use and
you attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect
route. Selecting “Yes” switches the naviga-
tion type to the newly used method of
navigation and a route will be planned for
the new destination. If “No” is selected the
navigation type remains unchanged.
Apps
To use an app that is compatible with Car-
Play, you must have the compatible app
already downloaded to your iPhone and
you must also be signed in. Refer to
http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(U.S. Resi-
dents) or
https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/
(Canadian Residents) to see the latest list of
available apps for CarPlay.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system allows you to access
Customer Programmable feature settings
such as Language, Display, Units, Voice,
Clock, Camera (If Equipped), Safety & Driv-
ing Assistance, Mirrors & Wipers (If
Equipped), Brakes, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Com-
pass Settings (If Equipped), Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings
and Clear Personal Data (If Equipped)
through buttons on the touchscreen.
Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 4), or
press the “Apps” button (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV) located near the bottom of the touch-
screen, then press the “Settings” button on
the touchscreen to access the Settings
screen. When making a selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is high-
lighted, then press the preferred setting until
a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. The
following feature settings are available:
• Language • Lights
• Display • Doors & Locks
• Units • Engine Off Options
• Voice • Compass Setting (If
Equipped)
• Clock & Date • Audio
• Camera (If
Equipped)
• Phone/Bluetooth
• Safety/Assistance • SiriusXM Setup —
If Equipped
• Mirrors & Wipers (If
Equipped)
• Restore Settings
• Brakes • Clear Personal Data
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
Navigation Pop-Up
249
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station or select the next
or previous Media track.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station on the radio.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change the
source (AM, FM, SXM, Bluetooth, etc.)
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be interfered
with by the presence of mountains, buildings
or bridges, especially when you are far away
from the broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
Care And Maintenance
Observe the following precautions to ensure
the system is fully operational:
• The display lens should not come into con-
tact with pointed or rigid objects which
could damage its surface; use a soft, dry,
anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the sys-
tem: this could damage it beyond repair.
Anti-Theft Protection
The system is equipped with an anti-theft
protection system based on the exchange of
information with the electronic control unit
(Body Computer) on the vehicle. This guaran-
tees maximum safety.
If the check has a positive outcome, the
system will start to operate. See an autho-
rized dealer for further information.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
MULTIMEDIA
250
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF
EQUIPPED
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with
your hands on the steering wheel. You have
full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership
and driving experience. When connected to
an operable network, you can:
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian
operator who can connect you to emergency
responders.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the Uconnect App from your device. You
can also do so by logging into your owner
site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care
when your vehicle has an operable network
connection. Services can only be used
where coverage is available.
• Receive text or email notifications if your
vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using
GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST
button on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are
located on your rearview mirror. The AS-
SIST button is used for contacting Road-
side Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM
Guardian Care, and Uconnect Care. The
SOS Call button connects you to a
SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can
connect you to emergency services.
2. The Uconnect “Apps
” button is lo-
cated in the center of the menu bar of the
radio touchscreen. This is where you can
manage your Apps.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on
the left side of your steering wheel. These
buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and
receive text messages, enter navigation
destinations, and control your radio and
media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian
services starting at the date of vehicle pur-
chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica-
tion from your dealer). To activate the trial, you
must first register with SiriusXM Guardian. Af-
ter the trial period, if you wish to continue
your SiriusXM Guardian services you can
choose to purchase a subscription.
251
NOTE:
You can check UconnectPhone.com for sys-
tem and device compatibility.
SiriusXM Guardian Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from
your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a
button press away with Assist.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from
hundreds of miles away.
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you
parked, using the convenient Vehicle
Finder function.
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route
from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s
navigation system.
For further information:.
• U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/guardian
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian
Download The Uconnect App
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and other valuable ser-
vices.
To use the Uconnect App:
• Search for and download the Uconnect App
from the store on your compatible iPhone or
Android powered device.
• Log in to the app using the email address
and password you created when you acti-
vated the services.
• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Re-
mote Start (if equipped), and activate your
horn and lights remotely.
Mobile App
MULTIMEDIA
252
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your vehicle’s navigation system.
• Press the menu button (three horizontal
lines) in the upper left corner of the app to
access settings and support information.
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display)
Subscriptions can be purchased online by
logging into your owner account. If you need
help push the ASSIST button on the rearview
mirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Care
or:
• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend
that you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Ac-
count information from the vehicle. You can
do this by pressing the ASSIST button in your
vehicle and selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or
call:
• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. Some features are lim-
ited while the vehicle is in motion. Some
services, including SOS, will NOT work
without a subscription and an operable
network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have SOS Call service
if needed. If the rearview mirror light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immedi-
ately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light on the instrument panel if a mal-
function is detected in any part of the
airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, the air bag system
may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not send a signal to
a SOS Call operator if an air bag is
deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
253
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in
danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location),
do not wait for voice contact from a SOS
Call operator. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into
the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a sig-
nal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the
SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to
your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD-
ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), the Uconnect features, apps,
and SiriusXM Guardian services, among
others, will not operate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped —
The overhead console contains an ASSIST
button, allowing you to speak to a call
center agent for support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a
flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help any-
time. Additional fees may apply. Addi-
tional information in this section.
• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for
Uconnect Apps and Features.
• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
NOTE:
In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Ser-
vices to you, we may record and monitor your
conversations with Roadside Assistance,
Uconnect Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or
Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are
initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices in your vehicle, your device, or via a
landline device, and may share information
obtained through such recording and moni-
toring in accordance with regulatory require-
ments. You acknowledge, agree, and consent
to any recording, monitoring or sharing of
information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Assist And SOS
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
MULTIMEDIA
254
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The
overhead console contains a SOS Call
button that, when pressed, may place a
call from your vehicle to a SiriusXM
Guardian Care operator, who can connect
you to emergency service operators, to
request help from local police, fire or
ambulance personnel. If this button is
accidentally pressed, you will have ten
seconds to stop the call. To cancel, press
the SOS Call button again or press the
“Cancel” button shown on the touch-
screen. After ten seconds has passed, the
SOS call will be placed and only the SOS
Call operator can cancel it. The LED light
on the rearview mirror will turn green once
a connection to a SOS Call operator has
been made. The green LED light will turn
off once the SOS Call is terminated. Have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle if
the rearview mirror light is continuously
red. On equipped vehicles, this feature
requires a functioning electrical system, a
subscription, and an operable network
connection. If a connection is made be-
tween a SOS Call operator and your vehicle,
you understand and agree that SOS Call
operators will stay on the line, even after you
connect with emergency services. The
Emergency services operator may, like any
other emergency call, record conversations
and sounds in and near your vehicle upon
connection.
3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped —
The Theft Alarm Notification feature noti-
fies you via email or text (SMS) message
when the vehicle’s factory-installed secu-
rity alarm system has been triggered.
There are a number of reasons why your
alarm may have been triggered, one of
which could be that your vehicle was sto-
len. If so, please see the details of the
Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below.
When activated, Theft Alarm Notification
is automatically set to send you an email
at the email address you provide should
the alarm go off. You may also opt to have
a text message sent to your device.
4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle
is stolen, contact local law enforcement
immediately to file a stolen vehicle report.
Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM
Guardian Care can help locate your ve-
hicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent
will ask for the stolen vehicle report num-
ber issued by local law enforcement. As
long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM Guard-
ian subscription and an operable network
connection, the agent may be able to
locate the stolen vehicle and work with
law enforcement to help recover it. Your
vehicle must have an operable network
connection and must be registered with
SiriusXM Guardian with an active sub-
scription that includes the applicable
feature.
5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows
you and your passengers to connect their
portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi
capabilities of your Uconnect system.
Purchasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the
use of an Internet-enabled portable
device.
NOTE:
Uconnect offers a complimentary
3–month trial period that includes 1GB of
total data. The trial can be activated any
time within the first year of new vehicle
ownership.
255
a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box
should be un-checked.
b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option
from the toushcreeen to locate your
Hotspot Name and Password. Make
note of this information.
c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the
main Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check
the box to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot.
d. From your portable device Wi-Fi set-
tings menu, select the Hotspot Name
from the list of available networks and
enter the provided Password.
e.
Open the web browser on your portable
device and enter the following web ad-
dress:
https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login.
f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to
your existing one.
g. Select and purchase the desired sub-
scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot
will activate after a few minutes.
For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus-
tomer Care at: 866-595-1330.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in-vehicle SiriusXM
Guardian services to operate.
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect App allows
you to remotely lock or unlock your doors,
start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle
must be equipped with remote start, must
have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and
must have an operable network connection.
Services can only be used where coverage is
available. You can download the App from
Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store
(iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit
UconnectPhone.com to determine if your de-
vice is compatible. For Uconnect Phone cus-
tomer support and to determine if your device
is compatible.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com or for U.S.
residents call 1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
(English) or call:1-800-387-9983 (French).
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature
provides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually
any distance. You can send a request to your
vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not en-
tered your vehicle with the key, the
engine will shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-
off an engine that has been remote
started.
• This remote function requires your ve-
hicle to be equipped with a factory-
installed Remote Start system. To uti-
lize this feature after the Uconnect App
is downloaded, login with your user
name and password.
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guard-
ian Security PIN to confirm the request.
Press the “remote start” icon on your
Uconnect App to remotely start the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA
256
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM
Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped —
This feature provides the ability to lock or
unlock the door on your vehicle, without the
keys and from virtually any distance. You can
send a request to your vehicle in one of three
ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on
the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm
the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on
your Uconnect App to lock the doors, and
press the “open lock” icon to unlock the
driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM
Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s
easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. You
can send a request to your vehicle in one of
three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care
on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm
the request. You can set-up notifications for
your account to receive an email or text
(SMS) message every time a command is
sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at
mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to man-
age SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Vehicle Finder—If Equipped
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to find the location of
your vehicle when you can't remember where
it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and
flash the lights to make finding your vehicle
even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the
location of your vehicle.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap-
pears, once your vehicle is located.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
257
Send & Go
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to search for a desti-
nation on your mobile device and then send
the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Naviga-
tion system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would
like to navigate to, or search through one
of the categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to
from the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and
then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the
Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve-
hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on
the pop-up that appears on the touch-
screen, when the vehicle is started.
USB/MEDIA PLAYER
CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an external device to be
plugged into the USB port or AUX Jack.
Located below the heating ventilation and air
conditioning controls is the front USB port
and AUX jack.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for external USB support capa-
bility.
Rear Center Console USB Port
Located on the rear of the center console is a
second USB port.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB
port may be charge only, or media file ca-
pable.
NAVIGATION — IF
EQUIPPED
• The information in the section below is only
applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C
NAV With 8.4–inch Display system.
Front USB Port And AUX Jack
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
Rear Center Console USB (Charge Only)
Port — If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
258
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in
the menu bar to access the Navigation sys-
tem.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen in the lower right area of the
screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guid-
ance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav
Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
259
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories
2 — Find A Destination
3 — View Map
4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination
5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination
6 — Navigation Settings
7 — Emergency
8 — Information
MULTIMEDIA
260
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button
on the touchscreen.
• Select a category and then a subcategory, if
necessary.
• Select your destination and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the
touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”
or “Search All” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” or “OK” button on the
touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• Enter a navigation destination without tak-
ing your hands off the wheel.
•
Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "
Find Ad-
dress 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Using your touchscreen’s keyboard is not
available while your vehicle is in motion.
However, you can also use Voice Commands
to enter an address while moving. Refer to
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in
this section for further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• To add a Home location, press the “Nav”
button on the touchscreen in the menu bar
to access the Navigation system and the
Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Home” button on the touch-
screen. You can add a Home location by
either selecting “Spell City,” “Spell
Street,” or “Select Country.” Select County
is automatically filled out based on your
state.
• Once you have entered your Home location,
select the “Save Home” button located on
the lower left-hand side of your touch-
screen.
• To delete a saved Home location (or other
saved locations), so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Nav” button on
the touchscreen, and in the “Where To”
screen, press “Edit Where To” and then
press the “Home” button on the touch-
screen. Under the Manage screen press the
“Reset Location” button. A confirmation
screen will appear asking if you “Are you
sure you want to reset this location?” Press
“Reset” to confirm the deletion. Set a new
Home location by following the previous
instructions.
Home
• A Home location must be saved in the
system. From the Main Navigation menu,
press the “Home” button on the
touchscreen.
261
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
MULTIMEDIA
262
Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon
could appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touch-
screen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected,
you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as
the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the device may not calcu-
late a detour. For more information, see your
Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By
enhancing your vehicle's navigation system
with the ability to see detailed traffic infor-
mation, you can pinpoint traffic incidents,
determine average traffic speed and estimate
travel time along your route. Since the service
is integrated with a vehicle's navigation sys-
tem, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers
pick the fastest route based on traffic condi-
tions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, acci-
dents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources,
including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic informa-
tion.
• View conditions for points along your route
and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of
the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre-
mium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems.
SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your
fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel
prices in your area and route to the station
of your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie the-
atres and listings in your area and route to
the theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores
as well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check a variety of local and
national weather information from radar
maps to current and 5-day forecast.
263
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely
integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link infor-
mation arrives and updates in the back-
ground. You can access the information
whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch-
screen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,
sold separately after the trial subscription
included with your vehicle purchase.
MULTIMEDIA
264
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
265
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply With Text Message
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires
Bluetooth MAP profile)
MULTIMEDIA
266
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Do Not Disturb
4 — Reply with Text Message**
5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name
6 — Conference Call*
7 — Phone Pairing
8 — Text Messaging Menu**
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Contact Menu
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Favorite Contacts
13 — Mute Microphone
14 — Decline Incoming Call
15 — Answer/Redial/Hold
16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires
Bluetooth MAP profile)
267
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone
calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec-
tion).
The hands-free calling feature is made pos-
sible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different elec-
tronic devices to connect to each other wire-
lessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compat-
ible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features
to utilize all of the Uconnect system fea-
tures.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab-
lishing a wireless connection between a cel-
lular phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you
first must determine if your mobile phone
and software are compatible with the
Uconnect system. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 3
MULTIMEDIA
268
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen. A message will dis-
play asking “No phone connected. Do you
want to pair a phone?” Select Yes.
3. After selecting “Yes,” go through the
steps to pair your phone using your
Bluetooth connectivity.
4. Once pairing is successful, a message will
display asking, “Make this your Favorite?”
Then select Yes or No.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
• A message will display asking, “No
Phone Connected. Would you like to
pair a phone?” Select Yes. After press-
ing Yes, the radio prompts will take you
through the steps to connect your
phone via Bluetooth.
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting. Once the pairing has been
successful, a message will display
“Bluetooth pairing successful: The de-
vice supports Phone and Audio.” Click
“OK.”
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Phone/Bluetooth,” and then se-
lect “Paired Phones and Audio Devices.”
5. The “Add Device” option will be listed
under the “Paired Phones” section.
Pair Your iPhone:
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
269
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect
Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN number.
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mo-
bile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
Pairing Request
Uconnect Device
MULTIMEDIA
270
5. Once your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook,
check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati-
cally download the phonebook. This is
so you can make calls by saying the
name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on the
Uconnect system then accept the Bluetooth
pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mo-
bile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
NOTE:
Keep in mind that software updates, either on
your phone or Uconnect system, may inter-
fere with the Bluetooth connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process.
However, first, make sure to delete the device
from the list of phones on your Uconnect
system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth settings.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com or
www.DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
www.DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Resi-
dents) or an authorized dealer for additional
information on mobile phone pairing and for
a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
Pairing Request
271
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During
Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on
the Phone main screen, that appears only
when a call is in progress, to mute and
unmute the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Trans-
fer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset
and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone.
Phonebook contacts are updated each time
that the phone is connected. Phonebook en-
tries are displayed in the Contacts menu. If
your phone book entries do not appear, check
the settings on your phone. Some phones
require you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse,
press the “Phone” button on the touch-
screen, then the “Phonebook” button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown in the Favorites menu.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John
Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater
system accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for
faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”
for example.
• If you are listening to available voice com-
mand options, you do not have to listen to
the entire list. When you hear the command
that you need, push the
button on the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say
your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button
, then say a command. For example,
"Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob
to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the VR button
on the
steering wheel and say "help." Push the VR
button
and say "cancel" to cancel the
help session.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-
ing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of
your missed calls and text messages while
you were using Do Not Disturb.
MULTIMEDIA
272
To activate Do Not Disturb, select “Pairing”
on the phone menu bar, and select “Do Not
Disturb” from the Settings menu. You can
also activate it using the “Do Not Disturb”
button at the top of every Phone screen.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only avail-
able on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect
system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s
audio system.
To listen to incoming text messages, or any
messages currently on the mobile phone,
select the “Messages” menu and press the
“Listen” button next to the message you want
to listen to.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
To Enable Incoming Text Messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Settings.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
273
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
• A pop up will appear asking you to
accept a request for permission to con-
nect to your messages. Select “Don’t
ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted from
the Uconnect system when the ignition is
turned to the OFF position.
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after
pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or
trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth
settings (Blackberry devices).
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard re-
boot). Your mobile phone can still be con-
nected manually. Close all applications
that may be operating (refer to mobile
phone manufacturer’s instructions), and
follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting)
Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect Sys-
tem”.
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile
phone. Refer to your mobile phone manu-
facturer or cellular provider for instruc-
tions. This should only be done as a last
resort.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mo-
bile phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual). This
should only be done as a last resort.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four num-
bers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook.
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
MULTIMEDIA
274
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six num-
bers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 4 system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) car-
riers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual
for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-
Free Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or
in the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touch-
screen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV sys-
tem. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with
8.4-inch display system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steer-
ing wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
• Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C NAV
275
• Reduce background noise. Wind and pas-
senger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The micro-
phone is positioned on the rearview mirror
and aimed at the driver.
• Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recogni-
tion (VR) or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
• You can interrupt the help message or sys-
tem prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
the current category.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be
given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep,
say:
•“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
•“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
•“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues ap-
pear on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
•“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A
Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Ra-
dio, Media, Or Climate Functions. For
8.4–inch System Only: Push To Begin
Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
MULTIMEDIA
276
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The
system provides you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (if equipped).
Voice operation is only available for con-
nected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all ve-
hicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
•“Change source to Bluetooth”
•“Change source to AUX”
•“Change source to USB”
•“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Great-
est Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”;
“Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch-
screen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 3 Radio
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
Uconnect 3 Media
277
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-
book button is illuminated on your touch-
screen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone com-
patibility and pairing instructions.
Push the VR button
or Phone button
. After the beep, say one of the following
commands:
•“Call John Smith”
•“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
•“Redial (call previous outgoing phone num-
ber)”
•“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
the VR button
or Phone button and
say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly
as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
Uconnect 3 Phone
Uconnect 4 Phone
MULTIMEDIA
278
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect announces incoming text mes-
sages. Push the VR button
or Phone
button
(if enabled) and say “Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired
to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the VR button
or Phone
button
(if enabled). After the beep,
say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined mes-
sages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60> min-
utes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60> min-
utes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed, otherwise
the system does not transpose the
message.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this fea-
ture. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. To enable this
feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these
four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Ve-
hicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
279
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle tempera-
tures hands-free and keep everyone comfort-
able while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle
is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•“Set the passenger temperature to 70
degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you
save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you
want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills,
Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR
button
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest
coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Climate
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch
Display Climate
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
MULTIMEDIA
280
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If
Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, includ-
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call
will NOT work without an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
connection compatible with your device.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is re-
quired to take advantage of the SiriusXM
Guardian services in the next section of this
guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect
4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the con-
tinental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and
Canada. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for
details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from
your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
• U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if
you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian.
Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key
systems that need your attention. For further
information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
281
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV )
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and sending a destination
from your phone to your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM
Guardian services, download the
Uconnect App to your mobile device. Use
your Owner Account login and password to
open the app.
2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock,
Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your
horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
3. Press the “Location” button on the bot-
tom menu bar of the app to bring up a
map to locate your vehicle or send a loca-
tion to your Uconnect Navigation using
Vehicle Finder and Send & Go , if
equipped.
4. Press the “Settings” side menu in the
upper left corner of the app to bring up
app settings.
NOTE:
For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the5-day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a
suite of services that brings a wealth of infor-
mation right to your Uconnect 4C NAV sys-
tem. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Show fuel prices”
•“Show 5 - day weather forecast”
•“Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with
Voice Command.
Mobile App
SiriusXM Travel Link
MULTIMEDIA
282
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural lan-
guage to understand what you mean and
responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release
the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages and
many other useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-
ing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you
were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
•
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri
Eyes Free Available
283
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice rec-
ognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto
your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your
Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to
activate Android’s VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android, Android Auto,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your iPhone and
a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using
the factory-provided Lightning cable, and
press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
MULTIMEDIA
284
“Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to ac-
tivate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s
features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps — if equipped
• Additional Apps — if equipped
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
285
Additional Information
©
2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar and Uconnect are registered trade-
marks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trade-
mark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of
Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit
www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit
www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit
www.siriusxm.com/guardian or
call: 1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or
call: 1-877-324-9091
MULTIMEDIA
286
SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure
to have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss ad-
ditional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue
to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems
or the specific work you want done. If you've
had an accident or work done that is not on
your maintenance log, let the service advisor
know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must
have your vehicle by the end of the day,
discuss the situation with the service advisor
and list the items in order of priority. At many
authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these ar-
rangements when you call for an appoint-
ment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high qual-
ity service. The manufacturer's authorized
dealer have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest in-
formation to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor-
rectly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and of-
fice)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
287
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing diffi-
culties, the manufacturer has installed spe-
cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional tele-
typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dial-
ing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.
For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con-
nect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract
for a vehicle to help protect you from the high
cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac-
turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
The manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-
chased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufactur-
er's service contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the manufac-
turer's service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer's
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
288
service contract, and you require service after
the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve
any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-
gines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
WARNING!
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the
terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran-
ties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accesso-
ries are available from an authorized dealer.
They are recommended for your vehicle in
order to help keep the vehicle operating at its
best.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should im-
mediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in in-
dividual problems between you, an au-
thorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
289
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-
424-9153); or go to
http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Cana-
dian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle De-
fect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, United States customers may
visit the Jeep Contact Us page at
www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove
Compartment Material” from the left
menu. You can also purchase a copy by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you
prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, may be purchased by vis-
iting www.techauthority.com (U.S.) or by
calling 1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-
tronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT
websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select
“Owner/Service Manuals”. Then select
your desired model year and vehicle from
the drop down lists.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
290
Accessories..................227
Mopar ...................227
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) ..................143
Adding Fuel .................160
Adding Washing Fluid ...........196
Additives, Fuel................225
AirBag ....................101
Advance Front Air Bag .........101
Air Bag Operation ............102
Air Bag Warning Light ..........99
Driver Knee Air Bag ...........103
Enhanced Accident Response .107, 187
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ......187
Front Air Bag ...............101
If Deployment Occurs .........106
Knee Impact Bolsters .........103
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .109
Maintenance ...............109
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .100
Side Air Bags ..............103
Transporting Pets ............121
Air Bag Light............57, 99, 122
Air Conditioning Filter ............43
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ......43
Air Pressure
Tires ....................209
Alarm
Arm The System .............16
Disarm The System ............16
Security Alarm ............16, 59
Android Auto ..........237, 243, 283
Apps ....................246
Communication .............246
Maps ...................245
Music ...................246
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........225
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......69
Anti-Lock Warning Light ........60, 64
Apple CarPlay .........238, 247, 284
Apps
....................249
Maps ...................248
Messages .................248
Music ...................248
Phone ...................248
Assist,
Hill Start................70
Audio Systems (Radio) ...........232
Auto
Down Power Windows .........44
Automatic Headlights ............28
Automatic High Beams ...........29
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .42
Automatic Transmission.......132, 197
Adding Fluid ...............227
Autostick .................134
Fluid Level Check ............197
Fluid Type ................227
Auto Up Power Windows...........45
Axle Fluid...................227
Axle Lubrication ...............227
Back-Up Camera ..............159
Battery ..................58, 198
Charging System Light ..........58
Belts, Seat ..................122
Blind Spot Monitoring ............78
B-Pillar Location ..............205
Brake Assist System .............70
Brake Control System, Electronic .....70
Brake Fluid ..................227
Brakes.....................196
Brake System ................196
Fluid Check ...............227
Master Cylinder .............196
Warning Light ...............57
INDEX
291
Bulbs, Light .................124
Camera ....................159
Camera, Rear ................159
Capacities, Fluid ..............225
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...............193
Carbon Monoxide Warning .........122
Car Washes ..................220
Changing A Flat Tire .........172, 200
Chart, Tire Sizing ..............201
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) ..............67
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .121
Checks, Safety ................121
Child Restraint................110
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..............112
Child Seat Installation .........119
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat
Belt ....................117
Infant And Child Restraints ......111
LATCH Positions ............114
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . .116
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children ..................114
Older Children And Child Restraints .112
Seating Positions ............113
Child Safety Locks ..............21
Cleaning
Wheels ..................215
Climate Control ................34
Automatic .................34
Manual ...................34
Clock Settings ................231
Clutch .....................196
Fluid ....................196
Compact Spare Tire .............213
Connector
UCI ....................258
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .258
Contract, Service ..............288
Cooling System ...............195
Coolant Level ..............195
Cooling Capacity ...........
.225
Selection
Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ............225, 226
Cruise Light................65, 66
Customer
Assistance ............287
Customer Programmable Features . . . .249
Cybersecurity.................229
Daytime Running Lights ...........28
Dealer Service ................198
Defroster, Rear Window ...........32
Defroster, Windshield............123
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ..................28
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...............195
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..........185
Do Not Disturb ............272, 283
Door Ajar .................58, 59
Door Ajar Light ..............58, 59
Drag And Drop Menu ........235, 241
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ............22
Electric Brake Control System .......70
Anti-Lock Brake System .........69
Electric Park Brake .............126
Electric Parking Brake ...........126
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)......75
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) ..................141
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....71
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light .....................58
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ........164
Jacking ...............172, 200
Jump Starting ..............180
INDEX
292
Overheating ...............182
Tow Hooks ................186
Towing ...................185
Emission Control System Maintenance . .67
Engine.....................193
Break-In Recommendations ......126
Checking Oil Level ...........195
Compartment ..............193
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........226
Cooling ..................195
Exhaust Gas Caution ..........122
Fuel Requirements ...........224
Jump Starting ..............180
Oil..................225, 226
Oil Filler Cap ...............193
Oil Selection ...............225
Overheating ...............182
Starting ..................125
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ...............107, 187
Exhaust Gas Cautions ...........122
Exhaust System ...............122
Exterior Lighting................27
Exterior Lights .............27, 124
Filters
Air Conditioning ..............43
Engine Oil ................226
Flashers
Hazard Warning .............164
Turn Signals ..........30, 66, 124
Flash-To-Pass .................28
Fluid, Brake .................227
Fluid Capacities ...............225
Fluid Leaks ..................124
Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil ................195
Fluids And Lubricants ...........226
Fog Lights ...................30
Fold-Flat Seats ................22
Forward Collision Warning
.......78,
81
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..........183
Fuel ......................224
Adding .................
.160
Additives .................225
Gasoline .................224
Gauge ....................60
Materials Added .............225
Octane Rating ...........224, 226
Requirements ..............224
Specifications ..............226
Fuses .....................166
Gasoline, (Fuel) ...............224
Gauges
Fuel .....................60
Gear Ranges .................130
Gear Selector Override ...........183
General Information.............250
Glass Cleaning ................222
Hazard Warning Flashers..........164
Headlights
Automatic .................28
Automatic High Beam ..........29
Delay ....................29
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .28
Lights On Reminder ...........29
Passing ...................28
Switch ...................27
Time Delay .................29
Head Restraints ................25
Head Rests ...................25
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch ....................28
Hill Descent Control .............76
Hill Descent Control Indicator .......76
Hill Start Assist ................70
Hood Prop ...................49
Hood Release .................49
293
Ignition .....................13
Switch ...................13
Instrument Cluster............55, 66
Descriptions ................66
Display ...................54
Display Controls ..............54
Engine Oil Reset .............55
Menu Items ................55
Instrument Cluster Display .........54
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....221
Interior Appearance Care .........220
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....30
Introduction ...................1
Inverter
Power ....................51
Inverter Outlet (115V) ............51
Jacking And Tire Changing ........172
Jacking Instructions ............173
Jack Location ................172
Jack Operation .........172, 173, 200
Jump Starting ................180
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm ..............16
Disarm The Alarm ............16
Keyless Entry ...............17
Remote Keyless Entry ..........12
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..............17
Enter The Trunk ..............17
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ........17
Passive Entry ...............17
Passive Entry Programming .......17
Remote Control ..............17
Unlock From The Driver’s Side .....17
Unlock From The Passenger’s Side . .17
Keyless Entry .................12
Keys .......................12
Replacement ...............13
Lane Change And Turn Signals .......30
LaneSense ..................156
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............94
Latches ....................124
Lead Free Gasoline .............224
Leaks, Fluid .................124
Life Of Tires .................211
Liftgate .....................50
Closing
...................50
Opening ..................
50
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......
32
Light Bulbs ..................124
Lights .....................124
AirBag .............57, 99, 122
Automatic Headlights ..........28
Automatic High Beam ..........29
Brake Assist Warning ...........75
Brake Warning ...............57
Cruise .................65, 66
Daytime Running .............28
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .......28
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ..................58
Exterior ..................124
Fog .....................30
Hazard Warning Flasher ........164
Headlights .................27
Headlights On Reminder ........29
Headlight Switch .............27
High Beam .................28
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......28
Hill Descent Control Indicator .....76
Instrument Cluster ............27
Lights On Reminder ...........29
Malfunction Indicator
(Check Engine) ..............61
Park .....................66
Passing ...................28
Seat Belt Reminder ...........59
Security Alarm ..............59
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ....85
INDEX
294
Traction Control ..............75
Turn Signals ..........30, 66, 124
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .............58, 66
Loading Vehicle
Tires ....................205
Locks
Child Protection ..............21
Low Tire Pressure System ..........85
Luggage Carrier ................52
Lug Nuts ...................223
Maintenance ..................49
Maintenance Free Battery .........198
Maintenance Schedule ...........188
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) .................61, 67
Manual
Service ..................290
Manual Transmission ........129, 197
Fluid Level Check ............197
Shift Speeds ...............130
Master Cylinder
Brakes ...................196
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......85
Mopar Accessories .............227
Mopar Parts .................289
Navigation ..................258
New Vehicle Break-In Period .......126
Occupant Restraints .............91
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . .224, 226
Oil Change Indicator .............55
Reset ....................55
Oil, Engine ..................226
Capacity .................225
Checking .................195
Dipstick ..................195
Filter ....................226
Pressure Warning Light .........59
Recommendation ............225
Viscosity .................225
Oil Pressure Light ...............59
Onboard Diagnostic System .........66
Operating Precautions
............66
Operator
Manual
Owner's Manual .............290
Outlet
Power ....................51
Overheating, Engine ............182
Parking
Brake ................126
ParkSense
Front And Rear .............150
ParkSense Active Park Assist .......153
ParkSense System, Rear ..........147
Personalized Main Menu ......235, 241
Pets ......................121
Phonebook ..................272
Phone (Uconnect) ..............265
Pairing ..................268
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information ................205
Power
Inverter ...................51
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .51
Sunroof ...................47
Windows ..................43
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts......97
Preparation For Jacking ..........173
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .................97
Radial Ply Tires ...............210
Radio
Presets ...........232, 236, 242
Radio Frequency
General Information ......13, 16, 21
Radio Operation ........230, 233, 240
295
Radio Screens ............233, 240
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........31
Rear Camera .................159
Rear Cross Path ................79
Rear ParkSense System .......147, 150
Rear Window Defroster............32
Rear Wiper/Washer ..............32
Recreational Towing ............162
Reminder, Lights On .............29
Reminder, Seat Belt .............92
Remote Control
Starting System ..............14
Remote Keyless Entry ............12
Arm The Alarm ..............16
Disarm The Alarm ............16
Keyless Enter-N-Go ............17
Remote Starting System ...........14
Replacement Keys ..............13
Replacement Tires .............211
Reporting Safety Defects .........289
Restraints, Child ..............110
Restraints, Head ...............25
Roll Over Warning ...............2
Roof Type Carrier ...............52
Rotation, Tires ................217
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......122
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......124
Safety Defects, Reporting .........289
Safety, Exhaust Gas.............122
Safety Information, Tire ..........200
Safety Tips ..................121
Schedule, Maintenance ..........188
Seat Belt Reminder..............59
Seat Belts ................92, 122
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage .................96
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage .................96
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . .98
Child Restraints .............110
Energy Management Feature ......98
Front Seat ............92, 94, 95
Inspection ................122
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation
......95
Lap/Shoulder
Belts
............
9
4
Lap/Shoulder
Belt
Untwisting .....9
6
Operating
Instructions ..........95
Pregnant Women .............97
Pretensioners ...............97
Rear Seat ..................94
Reminder ..................92
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..........97
Seat Belt Reminder ...........92
Untwisting Procedure ..........96
Seat Belts Maintenance ..........221
Seats ......................22
Adjustment ................22
Head Restraints ..............25
Rear Folding ................22
Tilting ....................22
Security Alarm ..............16, 59
Arm The System .............16
Disarm The System ............16
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).....226
Sentry Key Replacement ..........13
Service Assistance .............287
Service Contract ...............288
Service Manuals ...............290
Shifting
Manual Transmission ..........129
Shift Lever Override.............183
Shoulder Belts.................94
Signals, Turn............30, 66, 124
Siri .......................283
Sirius Satellite Radio
Traffic & Weather ............263
Sirius Travel Link ..............263
SiriusXM Guardian .............251
Account ..................251
App ....................252
INDEX
296
In Vehicle Features ...........253
Maintaining Your Account .......253
Registration ...............252
Remote Features ............256
Renewing Subscriptions ........253
Send&Go ................258
Vehicle Finder ..............257
Vehicle Health Alert ..........281
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .........216
Snow Tires ..................213
Spare Tires...............213, 214
Spark Plugs..................226
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .............226
Oil .....................226
Speed Control
Distance Setting (ACC Only) .....143
Mode Setting (ACC Only) .......143
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......141
Starting ....................125
Button ...................13
Remote ...................14
Starting And Operating ...........125
Starting Procedures .............125
Steering
Tilt Column .................26
Wheel, Heated ...............27
Wheel, Tilt .................26
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......250
Storage, Vehicle ................43
Stuck, Freeing ................183
Sun Roof .................47, 49
Closing ...................48
Opening ...................48
Supplemental Restraint System – Air
Bag.....................101
Sway Control, Trailer .............71
System, Remote Starting ..........14
Telescoping Steering Column ........26
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .42
Text Messages.............232, 273
Tilt Steering Column .............26
Time Delay
Headlight ..................
29
Tips ......................250
T
ire And Loading Information Placard . .205
Tire Markings.................200
Tires............124, 208, 213, 217
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..........211
Air Pressure ...............208
Chains ...................216
Changing ..............172, 200
Compact Spare .............213
General Information .......208, 213
High Speed ................209
Inflation Pressure ............209
Jacking ...............172, 200
Life Of Tires ...............211
Load Capacity ..............205
Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ...........62, 85
Quality Grading .............217
Radial ...................210
Replacement ...............211
Rotation ..................217
Safety ...............200, 208
Sizes ....................201
Snow Tires ................213
Spare Tires ............213, 214
Spinning .................210
Tread Wear Indicators .........211
Tire Safety Information ...........200
Tire Service Kit ...............177
Tow Hooks
Emergency ................186
Towing.....................162
Disabled Vehicle .............185
Guide ...................162
Recreational ...............162
Weight
...................162
297
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)..........71
Trailer Towing ................162
Trailer Towing Guide ............162
Trailer Weight ................162
Transmission
Automatic .............132, 197
Fluid ....................227
Manual ..................129
Transporting Pets ..............121
Tread Wear Indicators ...........211
Turn Signals ...............30, 66
Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch Display .....230
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch
Display...................240
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display .....233
Uconnect Phone...............265
Making A Call ..............272
Pairing ..................268
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........217
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector .................258
Unleaded Gasoline .............224
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ......96
Vehicle Loading ...............205
Vehicle Storage ................43
Voice Command ........271, 272, 275
Voice Recognition
System (VR).........271, 272, 275
Warning Flashers, Hazard .........164
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ................64
Warnings, Roll Over ..............2
Warranty Information ............289
Washer
Adding Fluid ...............196
Washing Vehicle ...............220
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........215
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........215
Wind Buffeting ................45
Window Fogging................43
Windows
Power ....................
43
Windshield Defroster ............123
Windshield W
iper Blades .........199
Wipers Blade Replacement ........199
Wipers, Intermittent .............30
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ............31
Wrecker Towing ...............185
INDEX
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
Driving and Alcohol
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for
common questions. However, it is not a substitute
for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep
brand dealer.
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com⁄en ⁄owners (U.S.) provides special oers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation ⁄ Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
www.jeep.com (U.S.)
www.jeep.ca (Canada)
19BV-926-AA
Second Edition
